You are on page 1of 231

4.

Free -practice :8 - Asks the Ss to complete the letter with the adj in the box - Cuts down the letter into some parts then asks the Ss to put them in order (in groups of four) - Asks the Ss to open their books & check - Asks the Ss to rearrange 1.buitt/ house/ this/ will/ by the end/ be/ the year 2.difficult/ its/ your directions/ follow/ to 3. happy/ Im/ a gain/ meet/ that/ I/ you 4. delighted/ we/ receive/ are your letter/ to - Gets Ss answer & corrects 5. Homework: 1 - Asks the Ss to take notes Prepare unit 11 . GS + Listen and read

- Speak out -Complete the letter - Do as required (book closed) - Check - Rearrange sentences

- Copy

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

TEST 15
I. Circle the best answer : (4pts)
1. Cool the burns immediately.the pain a. to ease b. to relieve c. to minimize d.to get 2. People use first aidease the victims pain and anxiousty. a. so that b. in order to c. so as not to d. in order that 3. Its not difficultthe three words reduce; recise recycle. a. remember b. to remember c. remembering d. remembered 4. Milk bottles can be..after being cleaned a. Recycled b. thown away c. broken d. reused II. Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets (4 Bpts) 1. It/ not/ easy/ answer/ these questions 2. People speak English all over the world English III. Fill in the blanks with a suitable word (2pts) 1. Dont overheat the victims..blankets or coats 2. You should use garbage to make Key I. 1.c II. It is not easy to anwer these questions. English is spoken all over the world. III. 1. with 2. fertilizer 2b 3.b 4.d

Date of preparation: February 13, 2012 Date of teaching: February 15, 2012 UNIT 11 Period 67 I/ Objectives: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their anxiety and others. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: harbor, how do you do, mind, sugar cane, corn, crop, seat 2. Structure: Its (not) + adj + to-inf Would you mind + V-ing See + sb + doing sth 3 . Skills: Listening, speaking , raeding and writing III/ Technique: Brainstorming, pair work, group work, explanation, T or F IV/ Teaching aids: Text books, OHP, OHT, tape, stereo, pictures

Lesson 1 : Getting Started + Listen and Read

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities 1. Lead-in: ( Getting started) 3 - Asks the Ss to tell some interesting places in Vietnam. - Introduces the famous places in the picture (photo page 98) - Asks the Ss to match the names with the pictures. - Calls some to answer. Gives correction a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Nha rong Harbor c. The Temple Literature d. Halong Bay - Asks Ss if they are interested in these places. How can they express their interest?. Introduces the aim of the lesson. 2. Pre- practice:10 - Pre- teaches vocabulary Crop (n) (explanation) ( something such as grain, rice,..is grown in one season.) Sugar cane (n): What is used to make sugar?) Water buffalo (n) ( translation) buffalo -> buffaloes Forty- minute drive (explaination) Students activities - Tell some places - Look at and listen to - Do matching exercise - Give answer - take note

- Listen to

- Guess meaning, take note and repeat

Eg: The driver take 40 minutes Its a 40 minute drive - Checks Ss understanding ( using the drawing pictures to asks Ss to give the words to show each pictures) - Gives situations and introduces structures Id like to..... Its nice to ..... Would you mind + Ving?. Would you mind if +S+ V(past)? Eg: Would you mind sitting in the front of the taxi? Would you mind if I took a photo ? 3. Controlled practice:10 - Lets Ss listen to the dialogue the 1st time and answer the questions bellow: Who is talking in the conversation? Where are they now? - Lets the Ss listen to the 2nd time, pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation( book opened) a.- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups of four. - Calls some groups to present the dialogue. - Corrects pronunciation. - Asks Ss to read the dia silently and then answer the questions in pairs . Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam? How do they travel to Viet Nam? What do they see from the long to Ha Noi? What would Tim like to do? - Gets feedback and gives corrections Yes, it is They travel Viet Nam by bus b. Asks Ss to read the statements on the extra board and decide T/F. - Asks Ss to check the result with the partner - Gets feedback. - Gives corrections a.T b.T c.F d.T e.T f.F 4. Free-practice: 4 - Asks Ss to practice asking answering in pairs using the structure bellow * Would you mind if (I used you pen)? * Would you mind + (writing the answer for me)? (Respnose: No problem.) - Calls some pairs to speak out 5. Consolidation 3 - Aks Ss to complete the passage. Its the .time the Jones family come to Viet Nam. They . Around Viet Nam by.There are a lot things they have not seeen before such as rice paddies,..

- Tell the words - Take note

- Listen (book closed)

- Listen (book opened) - Practice the dialogue - Role play - Listen to - Read silently and answer in pairs Yes, it is They travel Viet Nam by bus

- Read and do T/F exercise - Check with partner - Give feedback - take note

- Practice speaking

- Speak out - Complete

They are intersted in the sight in Viet Nam , so they take a. - Gets feedback and gives correction. 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks Ss to coppy down Do exercise 2 again . Learn by heart new words and strucetures. Prepare speak ( find some intersting places in HCM city)

- Gives feedback

6. Self evaluation: ............................................................................................................................................................... Date of preparation: February 15, 2012 Date of teaching: February 17, 2012 UNIT 11 Period 68

Lesson 1 : Speak +Listen .

I/ Objectives: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: highway. 2. Structure: 3. Skills: Speaking - Listening III/ Techniques: T or F, Q & A, Filling exercises IV/ Teaching aids:Picture, tape, stereo, textbooks, OHP, OHT

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities SPEAK20 1. Lead in: - Sets a situation & example Would you mind sending me this letter ? - Introduces the point 2. Pre-practice : - Asks the Ss to look at the table in the book (p.100) - Explains this table Mind is used to make requests - Asks the Ss to elicit the forms Would you mind + V ing ? Would you mind if + S + V(past siple) Do you mind + if + S + V (present simple) - Calls some to answer Would you mind closing the door Students activities

- Listen - Listen & know - Look at the table in the book - Listen - Elicit the form and coppy

Responses: * Agreement: No, I dont mind./ No, of course not./not at all./ Please do./ please go ahead. * Disagreement: Im sorry I cant./ Im sorry, its impossible./ - Asks them to pay attention Reply for requests with mind Explains the requirement of the exercise - Gets the whole class to repeat all useful expressions 3. Controlled practice : - Has the Ss look at the situation useful expressions & the chart again - Asks them to work in pairs to make requests & suggestions * Suggestion : A : I want to visit a market. Could you suggest one ? B : How about going to Ben Thanh market ? A : Is it near here ? B : A bout a 15 minute walk A : Is it open everyday ? B : Its open daily form 5 a.m to 8 p.m A : Thank you very much - Gets some pairs to speak out & correts 4.Free- practice : - Asks the Ss to do pairwork again making dialogues One is a tourist who comes to their home town One is a person who lives in the neighborhood - Gets some pairs to speak out - Asks Ss to make the dialogue.(Dialogue map) You Excuse me! Id like to visist a market. Would you mind suggesting one? Tourist officer Yes

- Have a look at the table again - Repeat in chorus - Look at the situation & find out what needs to do -Work in pairs, making dialogues

- Speak out - Pairwork

- Speak out - Make the dialogue

Not at all. How about That sounds going to interesting.Thank Ben you. Thanh Market?It opens from 5

a.m to 8 p.m You are wel come LISTEN15 1. Pre-listening : a)-Teaches some words Tourist information center (exp)=> Ss guessing &translation Starving (adj) In the direction of=> explanation & example Ex: You re going in the direction of the bus station b)-Checking : example; synonym, Vietnamese meaning c)-Has the Ss look at the map & questions Is there a high way in the map ? How many roads are there in the map ? - Gets them to repeat all the words in the box 2. While- listening : - Has the Ss listen to the tape twice - Asks them to make the right choice for each place - Asks some questions Whats number ? Wheres is the bus station Which lead is the hotel ? - Lets the Ss listen once more - Gets them to check the answer with their friend - Lets them make question for the teacher to answer then gives answer keys a. restaurant b. b. hotel c. bus station d. pagoda e. temple 3.Free- practice : - Asks the Ss to find the differences between the 2 pictures - Calls some to speak out & corrects - Asks the Ss to give the way to do these kinds of exercise: find the position of places - Notices them the way to gives directions to someone 5. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Write the way to lead to your house Do exercise 2 (work book) Prepareread - Introducing some places of interest in VN - Preparing pictures of these places

- Copy down

- Listen, repeat, guess the words meang & take notes

- Give the meaning of the words - Look at the map & answer - Repeat - Listen twice - Do the exercise - Answer

- Listen once more - Check with friend - Make Qs for the T to answer

- Find the differ ences - Answer - Listen &know

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: February 19, 2012 Date of teaching: February 21, 2012 UNIT 11 Period 69

Lesson 1 : Read .

I/ Objectives :By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to know some more about famous sights in Viet Nam II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: giant, accommodation, oceanic institute, arrival, departures, limestone, magnificent, tribe, eternal. 2. Skills: Reading (skimming , for details) III/ Techniques: Skimming, scanning, Question and answer, brainstorming IV/ Teaching aids: Picture, textbook, OHT, OHP

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities * Checking up : 5ms Question - Call one pairs to speak out the dialogue Answer: Ssdialogue make at home . 1. Lead in: 3 - Network - Play the game network Beautiful seaside

Nha Trang
- Qs:Where is Nha Trang? What is interesting in it ? Are there flights to this place ? - Gets Ss answer & introduces the aims of the lesson 2. Pre-reading : 10 a)-Teaches some words sight (n) scenery (n) Oceanics Institute Accommodation (n) => explanation Arrive (v) => Arrival (n) departure (n) resort (n) => explanation tribe ( translation) =>tribal (a) recognize (v) => example - Answer - Listen - Listen, repeat, guess the words meaning then copy down

jungle (n) waterfall(n) b) Checking : rub out & remember c) Asks the Ss look at the book & explain the advertisements d) Asks the Ss read the Advertisement and answer the questions : Are there flights to HaNoi in Nha Trang ? What is NhaTrang called? What is DaLat known as ? Are there hotels in DaLat? What is the look at transport in SaPa? What are the sights in Halong Bay ? What is it recognized ? What can we do in HaLong Bay ? - Explains the 2 exercises from questions 3. While- reading : 15 a) Has the Ss to read the 3 advertisements silenlty then do exercise 1 - Has the Ss checks the answers with their friends - Asks Yes/No questions to check the answer (Ss pairwork) Ex : Are there caves in Nha Trang ? - Gets Ss answer &corrects cave: Ha longBay flights to Ha Noi: Nha Trang Hotels: Da lat, Sa Pa,Ha Long Bay . b) Lets them read the text again, answer. Where should they go ? - Notices the Ss to find out the words that make suitable places - Gets Ss feedback & corrects 4.Free- practice : 5 - Asks the Ss to work in groups, making an advertisement for a place they know much about sights; - Accommodation; Arrivals/ Departure - Gets some paper & read out loud 5/Consolidation 4 - Uses a chart with True/False statements 1.There is an oceanic Institute in Ha Long Bay 2. In SaPa there are waterfalls and lakes 3. You can go swimming and sunbathe in Nha Trang 4. You can buy many kinds of flowers in DaLat 5. One can visit tribe in SaPa. - Gets Ss answer & corrects 5.Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to take notes Make 2 sentence for each of the places in the book Write an advettisement to talk about one of interesting place in your hometown

- Listen & repeat - Listen & know - Answer

- Listen & know - Read silently execise 1 - Check the answer - Answer - No there arent - Give feedback

- Read silently again,answer - Listen & know - Give feedback - Do the requirement (for the execllent class) - Listen & correct - Listen - Decide T or F F (Nhatrang) F (In Dalat) T T T - Copy down

Do exercise 1,2/65 (workbook) Prepare write 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: February 20, 2012 Date of teaching: February 22, 2012

UNIT 11 Period 70 I/ Objectives

Lesson 1 : Write

By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to complete the second part of the story and the story about Uyen in the correct event. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: decide, paddle, canoe, hire, cloud, rescue, lean over, over turn, deep, stumble, go off, strangely, pool. 2. Structures: Simple past tense. 3. Skills: Writing, speaking III/ Techniques: Brainstorming, discussion, group work. IV/ Teaching aids: Picture, handouts, textbook, OHT, OHP

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Checking up:(5ms) Question: * Write some new words words Students activities * Answer: Wheres Ha Long Bay? What interesting in Nha Trang ? Are there flights to Sa Pa? .....................

-Listen to the teachers reading 1. Lead- in: 3 - Asks the Ss to listen the 1 st part of a story about travel ing around VietNam: Last week, while on - The past simple Vacation.) - Asks if the Ss know the language used in these - Listen & know sentences - Introduce the aims of the lesson : learn how to

write a narrative paragraph 2. Pre-writing : 10 - Lets the Ss read the first part of the story - Questions Where did the Brown go last week ? What did they do there ? What was the weather like ? - Gets Ss feedback and explains the para - Qs : Which tense is used in the story ? Are these sentences in correct chronotigical order ? - Gets Ss answer & notice the past tense in a narrative paragraph and the chronological order - Has the Ss read the sentences in the exercises - Explains some verbs in the story - Explains how to do the 2 exercises 3. While writing : 15 a)-Asks the Ss to complete the story by putting the sentences in the correct chonological order - Has them to check the answer in pairs - Gets them to write the story in a mini board after ducussing in groups - Gets some to read out & corrects c a g d f b e (e- b) b) Has the Ss look at the picture 4.Post -writing : 7 - Sticks 8 pictures on the bb - Asks the Ss to put them in correct chronological order - Asks them to write sentences describing these pictures using the cued words - Has them to change their partner & corrects - Calls 8 (some) to write these sentences on the bb - Calls others to corrects the mistakes if any - Has them write the complete para on their exeruse book * Guides the Ss to play the game: Hunting errors : T reads the para with some errors & the Ss have to find out these in groups Keys : d-b- haf- cg 5/Conslidation 2 - Recalls how to write a narrative parapraph using past simple putting the events in correct chronological order 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Write a para telling one of your expericences Do exercise9/69(workbook) Prepare Language focus - ed & ing participles - Requests with would/ you mind + V-ing

- Read silently - Answer - Listen - Answer Simple past Yes, they are - Listen - Read - Listen & copy down - Listen - Do the requirement - Check the answer in pairs - Write the complete story on the mini boards

- Have a look at the 8 picture - Stick pictures - Write sentences using the cues - Check the answer in pairs - Write on the bb - Correct the mistakes - Write the comple para on their notebook - Play game - Listen & know

- Recall

+ if .. 1. Self evaluation: ........................................................................................................................................................... ..... Date of preparation: February 22, 2012 Date of teaching: February 24, 2012

UNIT 11 Period 71

Lesson 5: Language Focus

I/ Objectives: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to use ed, ing participle and request with mind II/ Language contents: 1/ Vocabulary: 2/ Structures: past participle & present participle request with mind : Would/do you mind + V-ing Would/do you mind + if 3. Skills: Writing , reading,Speaking III/ Technique: Pair work, explanation IV/ Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures V/ Procedures of teaching:

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson:

Teachers activities Students activities * Checking up : 5ms Question: Answer: - Calls 2 Ss to complete the sentences Last year Hoa had terrible experience Last year/ Hoa/ have/ terrible experience One weekend they decide to go a picnic to One weekend/ they decide/ go a picnic/ Cuc Cuc Phuong National park Phuong National park Soon after arriving the park, it starts to rain Soon after/ arrive/ the park/ start to rain. -Listen, look at the things & answer I. ed and - ing participles10 1. Lead- in: - Sets a situation with picture & read object & Qs Whos he?Whats he doing ? The boy reading a newspaper is Ba Whats this?Wheres it made ? Hes Ba. Hes reading a newspaper

The watch made in Japan is mine Introduces the point 2. Pre-practice : - Asks the Ss to elicit the usage of participles in participle phrases => Used as an adjective modifies to a noun * Notes : If a person or a thing causes an affect to others present participle is used & if we/ it is caused by another past participle is used - Explains the 2 exercises & examples The boy is reading a book is Be The old Lamp made in china is dollars 3. While- practice : a)-Has the Ss to look at the pictures carefully - Asks them say who each peron is - Calls some to speak out loud - Gives correction b) Asks the Ss to look at pictures of 2 (exercises 2) - Asks them to describe the goods for sale using past participle - Has them check the answer with their friends - Calls some to write on the bb - Give correction 4.Post- practice : - Asks the Ss make sentences with the persons, things in the rom - Gets some to speak out & corrects II. Requests with20 Would/ Do you mind + V-ing ? Would/ Do you mind if + S + V ? 1. Lead- in : - Sets a situation & example Would you mind opening the door ? Would you mind if I opened the door ? - Introsuces the point 2. Pre- practice : - Asks the Ss to recall the form Would You mind + V-ing ? Do Would you mind if + S + V (past simple) Do you mind if + S + V (present simple) - Asks them to give out some ways of response these requests - Explains the requirement of the exercises 3. While- practice : a) Asks the Ss to make requests & answer in pairs (exercises 3 ) - Calls some pairs to read out loud - Gives correction b)Asks the Ss to work in pairs again looking at the pictures then make questions and give suitable responses - Explains the model in the book, then leaves time for Ss to practise

- Elicit the usage - Take notes - Listen & know from examples

- Look at the pictures & say who each person is - Look at the picture & know - Speak out loud - Look at the picture & know - Do exercise - Check with friends - Write on the bb - Listen - Make sentences - Speak out

- Listen - No, of course not - No, I dont mind

Make requests

- Listen - Work in pairs making request & answering - Do the requisement - Read out loud - Listen - Do pairwork

- Speak out loud - Do as required - Pairwork

- Calls some pairs to speak out loud & corrects 4. Post- practice : - Asks the Ss to work in pairs again making requests and responses - Calls one to make a model first T: Would you mind if I turned off the fan ? S : Not at all - Calls some pairs to speak out loud - Calls some to give requests & calls some to answers 5. Consolidation 5 - Asks the Ss to chooce the best one 1. I like the doll (make/ made/ making) of fabsic 2. The man (sit/ sitting/ siting) in front of the taxi is Mr Ba 3.Would you mind (waiting/ waited/ to wait) for some munites ? 4. Do you mind if I (borrow/ to borrow/ borrowd) your pen ? - Gest Ss feedback & corrects 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Do five exercises again Do exercise 4/66 (work book) Make 5 requests withmind and responses Prepase knowledge (work & structures) from Unit 9, 11

- One practice with the teacher - Speak out - Do as directed - Choose the best 1.Made 2.Sitting 3.Waiting 4.Borrow

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: February 25, 2012 Date of teaching: February 28, 2012 Period 72 LANGUAGE REVISION

I/ Objectives: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to use ed, ing participle and request with mind II/ Language contents: 1/ Vocabulary: 2/ Structures: past participle & present participle request with mind : Would/do you mind + V-ing Would/do you mind + if 3. Skills: Writing, Reading, speaking III/ Technique: Pair work, explanation IV/ Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures

V/ Procedures of teaching:

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson:

Teachers activities * . Checking up:(5ms) Question: Rewrite the sentences: 1. May I ask you some questions ? -> Would you mind.. 2. You /like /some cold drink -> Would.. 3. People bring milk to houses everyday. -> Milk . 1. Lead- in: 5 From the Ss answer above, says and intriduces the points and the aims of the lesson. 2. Pre-practice : 10 A. Participles a. Present participles (V- ing ) Eg: Do you mind the woman talking to Nam ? -> modifies a noun with active meaning. b. Past participle ( V-ed/III) Eg: She has a lot of books written in English. -> modifies a noun with passive meaning. B. Polite requests with mind a. Would/ Do you mind + Ving.?. Eg: Do you mind moving the table? b. Would you mind if I + V(past simple) ? C. Passive voice: Present simple: S + is/am/are + Vpp + by O Future simple: S + will/shall + Vpp + by O Modal V Notices: By people, everyone, them can be omitted. D.Requests, offers & promises Requests: Can / Could you .? Will/ Would you.? Offer: Would you like to? Shall I.? Promises: using the future simple.( I promise. I will..) E. Adj + to inf/ a noun clause Eg: I am happy to see you again I am happy that you are working hard. F. Prase of purpose: In order (not ) to So as ( not ) to + V-binf

Students activities Answer:1. Would you mind if I aksed you some questions ? 2. Would you like some cold drink ? 3. Milk is brought to house everyday.

- Listen

- Elicit the structures - Take notes

(not) to 3. Contrlled- practice:15 - Asks the Ss to do the exercise: - Do exercise I. Choose the best answer: 1. Would you mind if I (turned/ to turn/ turning) 1. turned on the TV 2. Its interesting (travel/ to travel/ traveling) 2. to travel around Viet Nam. 3. The toys ( make/ made/ making) of wood are 3. made beautiful. 4. The boy ( ride/ rode/ riding) a water buffalo is 4. riding my brother. 5. Garden waste (is collected/ collected/ are 5. is collected collected) to make compost. 6. She promises she ( lock/ locks/ will lock) the 6. will lock door bofore leaving. 7. (Can/ Will/ Shall) I borrow your car? 7. recycled 8. A milk bottle can be (recycled / reduced / 8. reused reused) thirty time. 9. He realized that his alarm clock didnt go (of / 9. off off / at). II. Rewrite the sentences:5 1. Could I borrow your newspapers ? 1.Would you mind if I borrowed your newspapers? -> Would you mind? 2...... 2. It/ difficult/ understand/ question. -> It is .. 3. I will repaie yur bicycle tomorrow. -> Your bicycle 4. Peole play football all over the world. -> Football. 5. I/ carry/ your luguage? -> Shall.. 6. Could you turn off the iar conditioner? -> Do you mind.? - Gives feedback and take note - Gets Ss feedback and corrects. 4.Free- practice : 4 - Make sentences Asks the Ss to make sentences (requests,offers,promises). Eg: Would you mind telling me your address? - Speak out - Gets ss speak out loud and corrects 5. Consolidation 1 - Recalls - Recalls the points of grammar and some kinds of exercises 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Review ( words, preposition, structures, questions and answers) from Unit 9 to Unit 11. Pays attention to exercise relating to the points above 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: February 27, 2012 Date of teaching: February 29, 2012

Unit 12 : Period :74 I/ Objectives:

Lesson 1:

Getting started & Listen and read

By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know some countries and their particularity II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: statue of liberty, surprise, tour, include, business 2. Structure: Present progressive tense Simple future tense 3. Skills: Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing III/ Technique: pair work, group work, brainstorming, question and answer, T or F IV/ Teaching aids Text books, OHP, OHT, pictures V/ Teaching procedures:

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Students activities Lead- in: 5 Chatting: T: Where do you want to visit among these countries? S: . T: Why? S: .. Introduces the situation Mrs Quyen is going to the USA for a vacation, and she is ringging her friend, Mrs Smith, to tell about the tour - Asks if the Ss know what Mrs Quyen is going to say - Corrects and leads 2. Pre-practice : 10 a)-Teaches some words include (v) Ex : Our accommodation is included in the ticket price come over (v) (explaination) ( to come someones house to visit for a short time) Pick up (v) (explaination) ( to come and get someone in your car to drive him/her to a place

- Chatting

- Listen - Answer - Listen - Listen, repeat, guess the words meaning, then copy down

abroad ( adv) = in a forein country Surprise (n) (v) -> surprised / surprising (adj) b) Checks Ss understanding Rub out & remember c) Introduces & revises grammar *Give an invitation & response - Would you like to go on a picnic with my family - Thats very kind of you but Im sorry Im busy ->Would you like + to inf ? *Present progressive with always Eg: He is always working - Asks the Ss look at the example in the book & elicit the usage of always - Gets feedback and corrects Always can be used with the present progressive to deseribe continually repeated actions. 3. Controlled- practice : 10 a) Asks the Ss to listen the dialogue twice and answer the question: What are they talking about? - Asks them to work in pairs, practising the dialogue - Calls some pairs to speak out loud & corrects pronunciation b) Asks them to read the dia again silently & summarize what & when Mrs smith do in the USA. - Gets feedback and corrects - Uses a chart & asks the Ss to complete Mrs Quyens schedule in min board - Gets Ss feedback & corrects c) Asks the Ss to answer the questions in the textbook - Gets the Ss to ask & answer the questions in pairs - Calls some to answer - Gives correction a. No, they wont. Because they are coming on a tour, and their acommodation is included in the ticket price, so they will stay at the hotel.

- Do as requirement - Elicit the grammar points

- Listen and answer - Practise the dia in pairs - Speak out loud - Listen & repeat - Read sitently, summarize what Mrs Smith do in the USA & when - Listen - Complete Mrs Quyens schedule

- Give answer - Read silently, answer the questions b. No, he wont. Because he will have a business - Asks & answer the questions in pairs - Answer meeting in the evening that day. - Listen c...

4.Free- practice : 10 - Asks the Ss to make an invitation and respond in pairs - Gets some pairs to speak out - Gives correction 5.Consolidation3 - Asks the Ss to close their books & answer When will Mr Thanh and Mrs Quyen come to San Franciso ? Will they stay at Mrs Smiths house ? why ? Why - Make the invitation in pairs (not) ? What will Mrs Smith do on Tuesday evening ? - Speak out Wednesday evening ? - Answer the questions (book closed) 4. Homework: (2ms)

- Asks the Ss to copy down Summarize the dias content Do 2 exercises again Prepare Speak( pre-read the itinerary) 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: February 29, 2012 Date of teaching: March 2, 2012 Unit 12 : Period :75 I/ Objectives: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know some countries and their particularity II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: statue of liberty, surprise, tour, include, business 2. Structure: Present progressive tense Simple future tense 3. Skills: Integrated skills: listening + speaking III/ Techniques: pair work, group work, brainstorming, question and answer, T or F IV/ Teaching aids Text books, OHP, OHT, pictures V/ Teaching procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities 2. Checking up previous knowledge: ( 5ms) * Questions: A : make an invitation B : decline it I. LEAD-IN:3 1. Sets the situations: - Organizes the game Jumbled words Ewn Oryk Awstignonth Sol Ngaegel Oachcig 2. Leads the lesson: - Today youll have a chance to practice making plan: Routine for a tour II. PRE-SPEAKING:5 1. Asks the students to read these information of plans and hotels. Students activities * Keys to questions: According to each Ss ideas - Play game - New York - Washington - Los Angeles - Chicago - Listen carefully - Read information of plans, hotels

Lesson 2:

Speak and Listen

- Explains some words + Via : (exp) + Rate per night (exp) + Single / double (exp) + Facilities (exp) + Gym (exp) + Business center (exp) - Asks the Ss to read the new words. 2. Checks understanding: - Translate Revere Hotel as a model III. WHILE-SPEAKING:7 - Guides Now you work in pairs, use the information in the brochures about the hotel and flights to complete your itinerary. Use the following as prompts in your conversation. - Models with a student - Asks the students to make similar dialogue or different but giving information - Asks the students to present. - Orders give comments - Calls on the students to write the itinerary on board. - Gives key IV. POST-SPEAKING:7 - Organizes a contest of making itinerary to Hanoi - Asks the students to practice in pairs or groups. - Gives some advertisements about hotels, means, sight -seeing places - Asks the students to use structure to discuss - Gives remarks. I. LEAD-IN:3 1. Sets the situations: - What is the weather like today? - Shall we go out with this climate ? 2. Leads into the new lesson: When we go abroad, we shall pay attention to the weather. Today youll listen to the weather reports and fill in the blanks in the table with the information you hear. II. PRE-LISTENING: 5 . Vocabulary: 1. Brainstorms and explains vocabulary of weather and temperature: humid, cloudy, rainy, cold, cool, dry, windy, fine, sunny, snowy, warm, minus, centigrade 2. Checks their understanding: Slap the board. - Asks the Ss some questions: + Have you ever listened to the weather forecast? + What does it often tell you about( weather or temperature)? + Do you think it is necessary to listen to the weather forecast? . Structure: - What is the weather like in (the North / Tokyo)? - Its rainy and cool with the temperature of 40oC III. WHILE-LISTENING:5

- Listen and copy down

- Read the new words. - Translate Revere Hotel - Listen carefully

- Listen and observe - Make similar dialogue or different with giving information - Present (in pairs) - Write on board - Copy down - Take notes. - Play game A Contest - Work in pairs or groups- Present - Discuss - Listen and take notes - Listen and answer - It is cold/cool/rainy - Listen

- Listen and copy down - Play game slap the board - Answer the teachers questions.

-Listen and take notes - Listen

- Plays the tape twice - Asks the students to fill in the blanks in the table. - Asks the students to listen again and again. - Asks the students to compare with their partner. - Calls on the students to give answers. - Asks the others for comments. - Gives correction. - Gives structures IV. POST_LISTENING:3 - Organizes a game which is the best weather forecast - Divides class into groups. They will prepare a weather forecast for the afternoon and evening in that day Which forecast used correctly, grammar treaty will be the winner. V. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to prepare a weather report for the next period. - Asks the Ss prepare for the next period: Read and read the post card of Mrs Quyen.

- Fill in the blanks in the table - Listen carefully - Compare with their partner - Give answers - Give comments - Listen and copy down - Listen and copy down - Play the game

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: March 2, 2012 Date of teaching: March 6, 2012

Unit 12 : Period :76 I/ Objectives

Lesson 3

Read

By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to get some information about interest places in the world. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Names of places in the USA, lava, pour out, prison, carve, volcano. 2. Structure: Past progressive tense with WHILE , WHEN. 2. Skills: Integrated skills: reading , comprehension III/ Techniques: Q and A, Guessing word, Filling in the chart. IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, OHT, OHP, handouts.

V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson:

Teachers activities *. Checking up previous knowledge: (Time needed: 5ms) * Questions: Present their /her/ his weather forecast 1. Lead in: 5 Questions: Do you remember Mrs Quyen ? Which country will she visit? What places of interest do you think she will visit in the USA ? - Lets the Ss look at the pictures in the book and introduces the aim of the lesson. 2. Pre-reading : 10 - Teaches some words Vocalno (n) Frame of lava (n) vacalno pour (v) overhead (adv) gesture Fishemans whary ( translation ) wine growing area(guessing) care (v) explanation and example situate (v) = place (v) prison (n) explanation - Checking : Blank fill 1.The.......from the Kilaueu ......were.......out when they flew overhead 2. There is a.......area in the Napa Vallry 3. The 4 busts of 4 merican presi dents are.........into rock - Explains the new point of grammar Ex: The lava was pouring out when we flew over head What were you doing at 1p.m yesterday afternoon? => The past progressive tense : a)Form : b)Usage : - On action happening at a secific time in the past - On action happing in the past another came suddenly *Used with when 3. While- reading:10 a) Has the Ss read the 5 postcards silently - Asks them to write what Mrs Quyen did and saw in each of these places - Lets them discuss the answer with their friend - Gets Ss answer & corrects b) Gets the Ss to read the 5 postcards again, answer the 5 questions (book P.118) - Has the Ss discuss the answer in pairs - Has them work in pairs again, asking & answering

Students activities

* Keys to questions: Students presentation

- Answer + Yes , I do + She will visit the USA. + San Francisco, ............ - Listen - Listen, repeat, guess the words mean ing, then take notes

- Fill in the blank lava vocalno pouring wine growing carved - Elicit the form, usage from example

Was/were + Ving

- Read silently - Write what Mrs Quyen saw & did

- Read silently again, answer - Discuss the answers in pairs - Asks & answer in pairs

the questions - Calls some to write on the bb - Gives correction a. She went there by plane. b. She saw a famous prison on the island of Alcatraz c. ..... 4.Post- reading :10 - Asks the Ss to close their books and directed them to play the games 20 questions. One thinks of a place or a thing others make Yes/No question to gues what (place) it is - Matching : 1.Waikiki Beach 2.Kilaueu Vocalno 3.Fishermans whary 4.Napa Valley 5.Alcatraz islands 6.Heads of four American presidents 7.Lake Mihigan 8.Empire statue Building 9.Statue of Liberty 5. Consolidation 3 - Gets Ss answer & recalls the lesson content 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Write the exercises 1,2 on your notebook Do exercise 3/71 (workbook) Prepare Write - How to write a postcard

- Write on the bb

- Play the game as required & directed

a.Hawaii b.New york c.Chicago d.Mounit Rushmore e.San Francisco f .. - Recall

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: March 4, 2012 Date of teaching: March7, 2012 Unit 12 : Period :77 I/ Objectives By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to write a postcard about a place you have visited. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: complain about, heaviness, suitcase, hospitable. 2. Structure: Simple tenses, progressive tenses. 3. Skills: Writing, reading III/ Techniques: Q and A, group work IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, OHT, OHP, postcards.

Lesson 4 Write

V/ Procedures of teaching: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Checking up :5ms Question: - Where did Mrs Quyen visit ? - What did she do there? 1. Lead- in: 5 - Gives some postcards, asks: What is it ? When do you write it? How do you write it in friendly way? - Introduces the aim of the lesson. 2. Pre - writing : 10 - Reminds some words related to the weather forecast, the people, the sights. - Asks Ss to read the open postcard from Mrs Quyen and asks: What did she write in the postcard? Whom did she wirte to ? - Asks Ss to complete Mrs Quyen postcard in pairs. - Calls one student to read the postcard out. Then gives correction. 1. in 6. lovely / nice 2. people 7. bought 3. weather 8. for 4. visited 9. heaviness 5. her 10. soon - Gives some questions (in extra board) Where did Mrs Quyen visit? What are the people like? Who did she meet? What did she see? ........ - Gets Ss reread the postcard and tell how to write a postcard. - Gets feedback and gives correction. Dear......, Place People Weather Who you meet/see What you see What you buy Greetings Signature 3. While- writing: 10 - Sets a scene: Imagine you are a tourist on a vaction in a certainly place/ city in Viet Nam. Write a poatcard to a friend about your trip using the information in books. Students activities

- Answer + It is a letter. ......... - Listen - Remind - Read and answer

- Complete in pairs - Read out loud - Take notes

- Answer

- Reread the postcard - Give feedback

- Listen and write

- Goes arround and helps. - Gets the Ss to change the postcards together and corrects. - Get two or three Ss postcards reads out loud and corrects. 4. Post- writing: 10 - Uses a chart with a postcard written with some errors, asks the Ss to hunt these errors in groups. Which group hunt most errors is the winner . We will have a wonderful time in Hoi An. The street is so narrow that cars are not allowed enter the centre in the town. Therefore we have to drive. The house are very old but so beatiful. However, I dont like the way they do business. It seem that every house have ashop to sell souvenirs and orter shiffs. People are very hospitable and helpful. The food look funny but it tastes qiute nice. I havent buy something for you but I bought you some little coloful lanterns. See you soon. Love, Lan - Gets feedback and find the winner. 5. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Write the postcard tthey have just written in the notebooks Do exercise 7/75 (workbook) Prepare Language focus - Past progressive - Progressive tense with always

- Change the postcard to friend - Read the postcard carefully and find the errors

- Listen and take note

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: March 7, 2012 Date of teaching: March 9, 2012 Unit 12 : Period :76 I/ Objectives By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to use past progressive tense with WHILE / WHEN and present progressive tense with ALWAYS. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: mailman, ring, cheer, race, drum, lose, miss. 2. Structure: progressive tenses. 3. Skills: Integrated skills: speaking, writing III/ Techniques: Explanation, context.

Lesson 5 Language Focus

IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures. V. Procedure in class:: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities *Checking up previous knowledge: (Time needed: 5 ms) * Questions: Calls on the students to present their post card Students activities

* Keys to questions: students postcard

A. PAST PROGRESSIVE :20 - Answer 1. Lead- in: - Questions: What did you do last night? Where were you doing at 7p.m last night? - Listen - Introduces the tense past progressive 2. Pre-practice : - Take note - Gives other example: Ex1: I was watching TV when he came. Ex2: What did Mr Quyen do while her husband was visiting the statue of Liberty? - Asks the Ss to elicit the form usage of the past - Elict the form progressive. a. Form:

b. Usage: Express + An action happening at special time in the past - Listen, know & copy down (when). + An action happening in the past when another came ( while). + Two actions were happening at the same time ( while) - Guides the Ss to do exercise. 3. Controlled- practice: a. Asks the Ss to look at the pictures and say what each person was doing at eight. - Calls some to speak out loud. - Corrects. b. Has the Ss look at the pictures then match the haft sentences in column A to those in column B. - Calls some to read the complete sentences. - Gives correction 4. Free-practice: - Asks the Ss to work in pairs, asking answering What were you doing at 3p.m yesterday? - Calls some pairs to speak out and corrects. B. THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE WITH ALWAYS17 1. Lead-in: - Sets a situation and example: - Look at the pictures and make sentences - Give feedback - Listen & know - Do matching exercise - Read out loud - Listen and take note - Practice in pairs - Speak out loud

S + was/ were + Ving

- Listen & know

Youre always talking in class. - Introduces the grammar point 2. Pre- practice: - Asks the Ss to elicit the structure. - Gets feedback, gives the form and usage. a. Form:

- Elicit the structure - Take note

b. Usage: To decribe continually repeated action. - Guides the Ss to do the exercise. 3. Controlled- practice: .- Asks the Ss to look at the pictures, writing the sentences using the present progressive with always - Calls some to write the sentences on the board. - Gives correction. 4. Free-practice: - Asks the Ss to work in pairs: one shows an action, another make sentence using the present progressive with always. - Calls some pairs to present and correct. 5. Consolidation2 - Asks the Ss to build sentence using the cues. 1. I/ doing/ homework/ 7.30 last night. 2. I/ have/ bath/ telephone/ ring. 3. John/ forget notebooks. - Calls some to write on the board and then corrects 6. Homework: (1m) - - Asks the Ss to copy down Do three exercise again on the notebooks Make three sentences using the past progressive with when or while, present progressive with always Do exercise 6/74 (workbook) Prepare Unit 13 Getting started Listen and Read - Some places of interst and some festivals in VN

S+ is/am/are+always+Ving

- Write the sentences - Write on the board - Take note - Pairworks - Speak out - Build sentences 1.. I was doing my homework at 7.30 last night. 2. ..... - Write on board

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: March 10, 2012 Date of teaching: March 13, 2012 Period :79 CORRECT THE TEST NUMBER 3 + TEST 15

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can:


- Learn from the errors in the tests. - Control better method of learning for next lessons. Teacher can evaluate students knowledge and change suitable method in next teaching lessons.

B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review): 2. Grammar: ( Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chain- game, picture cue drill, pair- work, gap-fill D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) 3. Key

I.Chn mt t c phn ghch chn pht m khc vi cc t cn li : 1. c 2.d 3. d 4. d II. Chn p n ng in vo ch trng : 1. would 2.pleased 3. recycling 4. shall 5. eyechart 6. mountain-climbing 7. minimize 8.florist III/. Cho dng ng ca ng t 1. telling 2.sit 3. to swim IV/. Vit li cu th hai sao cho cng ngha vi cu th nht 1.This novel will be written by that author in June. 2. It is difficult to understand the hanbook. 3. He climbed the treo as to get a better view. IV/. c on vn v tr li cu hi: 1.Every day , about twenty million paper bags and newspapers are thrown away. 2. Many countries have had plan to recycle waste paper to save money and labour. 3. With the help of the publish, sixty percents of waste paper is reccled. 4. For every ton of recycled newsprint, twelve tree can be saved.
4. Results Lp Bi HS lm/ s HS >= 8 >= 5 < 5 8A1 39 0 14 10 8A2 33 1 16 10 8A3 39 0 19 10 8A4 36 4 28 4 All 147 5 77 34 5. Homework (1 minute) : Prepare unit 5: Getting started + listen and read < 3.5 15 6 10 0 31

F/ Self- Evaluation: ................ ...........................................................................................................

KIM TRA 15 MN : TING ANH 8 I. Khoanh trn p n ng: 1. At 9 oclock yesterday we............................. on the beach. A. are lying B. have lain C. lay D. were lying 2. The baby________his food onto the floor and making his mother angry. A. always threw B. is always throwing C. has always thrown D. always throws 3. Are you going abroad this summer? A. going overseas B. going on holiday C. going to another country D. A&C 4. Will you pick me ________after the party?

A. on B. over C. through D. up II. Cho dng ng ca ng t trong ngoc: 1. Mr Blair is always (go) .................. to work by bus . 2. While we (have) .................... a drink , a waiter (drop) .................. a pile of plates. 3. Mr Brown (paint) ...................... a picture when I (come) ...................... III/ Tim li sai trong cc phn ghch sa li: The farmer was riding to town while he fell off his horse. A B C D KEY I. Khoanh trn p n ng: 1. D. were lying 2.B. is always throwing II. Cho dng ng ca ng t trong ngoc 1. going 2. were having 3. was painting - came III/ Tim li sai trong cc phn ghch sa li: B - > when

D. A&C 3. dropped

D. up

Date of preparation: March 12, 2012 Date of teaching: March 14, 2012

UNIT 13 Period :80 I/ Objectives

Lesson 1 : Getting Started + Listen and Read

By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to know some festivals in Viet Nam II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: interested in, ancient, keen on, pottery, fond of, fetch, competition, starting position, up set, yell, urge, rub, bamboo, participate, husk, judge, council leader. 2. Structure: passive voice. 3. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing. III/ Techniques: Scanning, contextual guessing words, T / F IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, OHP, OHT, cassette.

V/ Procedures of teaching:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: : Teachers activities * Checking up:(5ms) - Give the correct verd tense a.When I came, she (do) her homework. b.Mrs Quyen (go)shopping while her husband visit the statue of Libery I. Getting started :5 - Asks the Ss to work in pairs and answer Where Students activities

should these people go on their visits to VietNam ? - Call some to get Ss answer by asking should this - Answer person go to SonLa ? why?why not ? - Gives coreection - Answer the questions II. Listen and read : 1.Lead- in :5 - Listen - From the 1st situation, questions Should this person go to DoSon ? why ? - Ask and answer in pairs Are there any festivals in DoSon ? - Introduces the lesson through Networks Festivals 2. Pre-practice : 10 -Teaches some words Competition (n) explanation Upset (adj, v) make S.O unhappy Urge (v) make S.O do thgs hurrily award (v): the prise Pariticipate (v) in - Checking rub out & remember - Introduces the grammar point from examples 1.Compound adjectives : Ex: water- fetching Fire - making Form : N + V-ing Meaning : 2.Passive voice in the present : Is/am/are + pp 3. Controlled- practice :10 - Lets the Ss listen to the tape twice and answers Who are taking in the conversation ? Where are they now ? - Gets Ss answer; asks the Ss to practise the dialogue in pairs - Calls some pairs to speak out loud - Has them to read the dialogue silently and decide each sentence True or False - Gets ss feedback & corrects 4. Free- practice : 8 - Asks the Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering the questions - Have you ever joined a festival ? what is it ? - How was it held ? - Gets some pairs to speak out loud and corrects - Questions (books closed) Where is Liz? How many festivals are there in the dialogue ? - Gets Ss answer and recalls the lesson content 5. Homework: (2) - Listen, know -The bull fighting festival - Listen,repeat, guess the words meaning, then take notes

- Rub out & remem ber - Take notes

- Listen & answer - Practise the dialogue in pairs - Speak out loud - Read the dialogue silently; decide True or False - Ask and answer the questions in pairs

- Speak out - Answer - Listen

- Asks the Ss to copy down Practise the dialogue again Find 5 names of the festivals you know Prepare speak & Listen (preparations for festivals) Do exercise 3.5 (workbook)

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: March 14, 2012 Date of teaching: March 16, 2012

UNIT 13 Period :81 I/ Objectives

Lesson 2 : Speak and Listen

By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to talk about preparations for a festival and know what the Robinson prepare for Tet. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: pomegranate, marigold, watermelon seed, Spring-roll, peach, Apricot, tailor . 2. Structure: Simple future, near future 3. Skills: Speaking, Listening, Reading and Writing. III/ Techniques: brainstorming, pair work, chart IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, tape, cassette. V/ Procedures of teaching: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Checking up:(5ms) Question: Asks the Ss to reread the dia and then decide the sentences are T or F a. One person has to collect four water bottles in the water- fetching b. The fire is made without matches or lighters. c. The grand prize is given to the team with the msot points. 1. Lead in :5 - Questions Tells some festival you know What do people often do before fesitival ? What do they prepare ? Students activities Answer: a.F a. F b. T

- Gets Ss answer & leads to the aim of the lesson 2. Pre-practice : 10 - Teaches some new words Pomegranate (n) (real object) Peach blossoms(n) (drawing) Marigold (n) (real object) Dried watermelon seeds Spring rolls - Checking understanding. ( What and Where) - Asks the Ss to work with a partner, putting the sentences in the correct order - Gets Ss answer - Asks one pair to speak out loud - Asks the Ss to work in paris to discuss: What do people do to prepare for the following festivals ? * a village festival . aharvest * a school festival . a flower * a spring festival . Tet festival Suggestions : Decorate (the place where the festival will be held); paint; clean.. Buy cakes/ candies/ drinks/ fruits/.. Cook/ make cake Get new dress Write/send letter of invitation - Asks the Ss to guess what the Robinson will do and shop for tet 3.While- practice :10 - Asks the Ss to listen the tape and fill in the gaps (listen twice) - Gets Ss answer & corrects - Asks them to listen again and complete the notes : Things to do - Gets Ss feedback & corrects Keys : 1.a) Mr Robinson/ flower market b) traditional c) of dried watermelon seeds d) make 2. Mr Robinson : go to the flower market and buy some peach blossoms and a bunch of flower Liz : Buy a packet of dried watermelon seeds Mrs Robinson ask Mrs Ngoc how to make spring rolls 4. Post- practice : 15 - Asks the Ss to work in pairs, making up their own dialogue, talking about preparations for one of the festival above Dialogue suggestion : A: Is there a festival in your village next week ? B: Yes, that right. There are a lot of competions in this fetival :Rice cooking, flower arranging contest mini football matches... and some others

- Answer

- Listen - Take notes

- Read and remember - Put the sentences in correct order A-F-C-H-D-J-B-G-E-J - Speak out loud - Dicuss and list the things on the min board

- Dicsuss in pairs - Listen twice & do the gap fill -Take notes - Listen and complete - Take notes

- Pair works

A: Oh ! Its really interesting so what do you do to prepare for the festival ? (competition) B: Well decorate the stadium where the festival is hold then prepare things for the rice -cooking contest and a few things more. A: What about the boys ? B: They practise playing football for the competition A: Oh. Wonderful ! Would you mind if I joined the festival ? B: Please do. A: Thank you. Is there anything I can do for you ? B: Not really . Thanks. And now I have to go to the market to buy some flowers for our flower arranging contest. Bye see you next week A: Bye - Listen to - From Ss dialogue, recalls some preparations for the festivals - Answer - Asks Ss answer the questions below: a. What does Mrs Robinson want her husband to do? b. Does she want some marigolds? Why or why not? c. What does Mrs Robinson want Liz to do? - Takenotes - Gets feedback and corrects 5. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Write exercise 1,2 (Listening task on their notebook) Make another dialogue talking about preparations for another festival Do exercise 8/82 (workbook) Prepare Read 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: March 18, 2012 Date of teaching: March 20, 2012 UNIT 13 Period :82 I/ Objectives By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to understand special things on Christmas festival. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: decorate, custom, spread, throughout, greetings, carol, unsuitable, popular, saint, jolly, professor, base on. 2. Structure: Passive voice, causative form 3. Skills: Reading(skimming, scanning), Speaking,Writing

Lesson 3 : Read

III/ Techniques: brainstorming, skimming, scanning, guess word IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, OHT,OHP V/ Procedures of teaching: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson:

Teachers activities * Checking up: 5ms Question: - What are the Robinson family making preparations for Tet? 1. Lead- in :5 - Presents a Christmas card and asks : What is it ? What do it recall you ? What do people often do before/ on Christmas? 2. Pre-reading : 10 a)-Teaches some words : Spread-spread - spread (v) Ex: The disease is spreading fast design (v) explaination a part of Ex: Cards were a part of the Christmas tradition forty years later perform (v) picture & explanatire Suitable (adj) unsuitable (adj) Have S.O do sth Be based on Ex: This novel is based on historical facts Decorate(v): ( picture) Patron Saint (n) (Translation) b)Checking : Rub out and remember c)Introduces the grammar points Ex: Eight hundred years ago, Christmas songs were performed for people in towns and villages - Passive voice in the past

Students activities

- Have a look at the Christmas and answer

- Listen, repeat, guess the words meaning then copy down

- Say the meaning of the word again - Elicit the form from example

3.While- reading :10 - Asks the Ss to skim the 4 passages and answer How important is Christmas in many countries around the world ? - Asks the Ss to read the texts again silently then do exercise 1 - Gets Ss fesedback and gives correction - Asks the Ss to read the texts again and ask & answer the Qs in pairs - Gets some pairs to speak out & gives correction a. More than a century ago. b. He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his

Was/ were + pp

- Skim the para and answer - Read silently, complete the table - Gives answer - Asks & answer the questions in pairs - Answer and take notes

friends. c. 800 years ago. d. ....... 4. Post reading: 10 - Asks the Ss to work in pairs asking & answering Which festival is the most important in VN ? How important is it ? - Gets some to answer & corrects 5. Consolidation4 - Uses a chart with T/F statements 1.Christmas cards were designd by an American 2.Christmas tree came from the USA in the 1800s 3.Santa Claus is the same a character in professor Moores poem 4.Christmas songs were popular eight hundred years ago - Gets Ss feedback & recalls the lesson content 5. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Do the 2 exercises again Do exercise 7 (work book) Prepare Write - List out some main a activities in a festival you know

- Asks & answer the questions in pairs - Answer - Decide True or False

- Recall

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: March 18, 2012 Date of teaching: March 21, 2012

UNIT 13 Period :83 I/ Objectives

Lesson 4 : Write

By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to write a report on a festival. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: students background knowledge. 2. Structure: Simple past, present perfect. 3. Skills: reading, speaking and writing III/ Techniques: discussion, pair work, group work, brainstorming. IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, picture. V/ Procedures of teaching: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson:

Teachers activities *Checking up : 5ms Question: - Asks Ss to write some new words. Then answer the questions: Where was the Christmas tree from ? When? Why did an English man have some design a card? Who is Santa Claus? 1. Lead- in :5 - Hangs the picture of the rice-cooking festival again, asks the Ss: What is the name of the festival? What activities are there in the festival? ( use the information about the rice-cooking festival the have learned in the Listen and read) Can you report it? - Gets the Ss answer and tell the aim of the lesson. 2. Pre-writing : 10 a. Asks the Ss to complete the report of the ricecooking festival (use the information about the ricecooking festival the have learned in the Listen and read) - Gets feedback and corrects. b. Guides the Ss how to write a festival report by answering the questions: a. What is the name of the festival? b. Where were the festival held? c. How long did the festival last? d. How many activities were there? e. How many people took part in each activities? f. What did you think about the festival? *Notices: Use the past simple in the report. 3. While- reading:10 - Asks the Ss to write the similar report on a festival they joined or saw recently. - Gets the Ss change the writing in pairs and corrects mistakes. - Asks the Ss to work in groups of four, choose the most excellent writing and write it in the mini board. - Asks the Ss to hangs the boards the helps them corrects. 4. Post writing: 10 - Asks the Ss to report the festival they have just written before class. - Helps Ss corrects and gives good mark for excellent reporter. - Gets Ss feedback & recalls the lesson content 5. Consolidation 4 - Recalls how to write a festival report. - Notices the tense used in the report 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Rewrite the festival report on the notebook. Do exercise 7/93 (work book)

Students activities - answers

- Have a look at the picture and answer

- Listen - Complete the report - Gives answer - answer the questions

- Answer and take notes - Write a report - Change the writing in pairs - Work in groups - Take note - Report - Take note - Recall the content the lesson - Listen

Prepare Language focus + Passive voice in the present, past and the present perfect. + Compound words + Reported speech 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: March 21, 2012 Date of teaching: March 23, 2012 UNIT 13 Period :84 2. Skills: I/ Objectives

Lesson 5 : Language Focus 1,2

Reading, speaking and writing

By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to use passive form, compound noun, reported speech. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: break, jumble, scatter, bull, fight, plumber, faucet. 2. Structure: passive form, compound noun, reported speech. III/ Techniques: explanation, pair work, exercises. IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, picture. V/ Procedures of teaching: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Checking up:(5ms) * Questions: Asks students to report the festivals learned in the period lesson I. Passive form: 1. Lead in :5 - Asks the ss to match the words in column A with the - Do matching exercise form in column B A 1. Presentsimple 2. Past simple 3. Future simple B a. was/were + past participle. b. is/am/are + past participle c. will/shall +be + past participle - Answer - Calls Ss to give their answers. - Listen to - Introduce the aim of the lesson Students activities

2. Pre-practice : 10 - Asks the Ss to elicit the passive forms of the present & future tense, of the passive from the above exercise. Present: is/am/are + pp Future: will/shall + be + pp Modal V : Modal V + be + pp Past: was/were + pp Present perfect: have/has + been + pp 3.Controlled- practice:15 a) Asks the Ss to do exercise 1 (p. 128) - Notices the Ss the passive form of the verbs - Calls some to give feedback - Corrects a. were performed b. was decorated c. is made d. ....... b) Asks them to complete the conversation, using the verbs in the box in pairs - Gets Ss feedback and corrects

- Recall the passive form, then elicit the form for the past, present perfect tense

- Use the passive form of verbs in the box - Give feedback

- Complete the conves sation in pairs - Gives feedback - Take notes

* Answer keys: 1. jumbled 2. broken 3. broken 4. scatter 5. pulled - Read out - Calls some pairs to read the complete conversation 4.Free- practice:5 - Make sentences - Asks the Ss to make sentences using the passive forms - Write on the board - Calls some to go to the bb & write down IV. Consolidation3 - Asks the Ss to rewrite 1.I go to school by bus, Hoa said =>Hoa said that..... 2.My uncle has a farm, which raises cattle => My uncle has.... 3.People make fire in traditional way => Fire..... - Gets Ss feedback & corrects 4. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Do exercises (workbook) - Rewrite 1.Hoa said that she went to 2.My uncle has a cattle raising farm 3.Fire was make in traditional way - Copy down

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................ Date of preparation: March 21, 2012 Date of teaching: March 24, 2012 UNIT 13

Period :85

Lesson 5 : Language Focus 3,4

I/ Objectives By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to use passive form, compound noun, reported speech. II/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: break, jumble, scatter, bull, fight, plumber, faucet. 2. Structure: passive form, compound noun, reported speech. 2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing III/ Techniques: explanation, pair work, exercises. IV/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, picture. V/ Procedures of teaching: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities * Checking up 5 * Questions: Asks students to report the festivals learned in the period lesson I.Compound words:15 1.Lead- in: - Questions: Which festival is mentioned in Listen - Recall the form and read -> Its rice cooking festival ? What do we call this ? - Says and leads to the point - Listen 2.Pre- practice: - Asks the Ss to recall - Rewrite the sentences N + V-ing, Compound word - Guides the Ss to do the exercise 3.While- practice: - Asks the Ss to rewrite the sentences using a compound word Model: It is a contest in which participants have to cook rice Its a rice - cooking contest - Calls some to write the answer on the bb - Helps Ss corrects a. fire- making b. bull-fighting c. ...... 4.Post- practice: - Asks the Ss to make sentences using compound words - Calls some to speak out III.Reported speech: 20 1.Lead- in:

- Write on the bb - take notes

- Make sentences - Speak out

- From Ss answer, gives example Ex:I take part in a rice- cooking festival => She said, she took part in a rice- cooking festival => Introduces the point 2. Pre- practice : - Asks the Ss to draw out the way to change a direct speech into a reported one =>Changes in tenses Simple present => Simple past Present progressive => past progressive Future simple => would/ should =>changes in persons, adv 3.White- practice : - Asks the Ss to change into the reported speech - Calls some to rewrite on the bb - Corrects a. He said he could fix the faucets b. He said the pipes were broken. c. ........ 4. Post- practice : - Asks the Ss to work in teams Team A : make a sentence Team B:report what the member of team A said - Controls the class to play the games 5. Consolidation3 - Asks the Ss to rewrite 1.I go to school by bus, Hoa said =>Hoa said that..... 2.My uncle has a farm, which raises cattle => My uncle has.... 3.People make fire in traditional way => Fire..... - Gets Ss feedback & corrects 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Do 4 exercises a gain Do exercises (workbook) Prepare Unit 14 - Find some names of famous places in the world - Prepare words and preread Listen & read

- Look at the example and listen & know - Listen - Draw out - Recall

- Change into reported speech - Write on the bb - take notes

- Play the game as required and directed

- Rewrite 1.Hoa said that she went to 2.My uncle has a cattle raising farm 3.Fire was make in traditional way - Copy down

6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: March,21st , 2011. Date of teaching: March ,23rd , 2011


UNIT 14 Period :83 Lesson 1 : Getting Started + Listen and Read

I.Aims and objectives : Language content: + To get Ss to know how to get main information from a dialogue + To help them know more famous world landmarks Language function: + To help Ss be able to seek information about the language game to complete a summary. Educational aims : + To make the Ss understand and love some famous world landmarks 1.Language : Vocab : Landmark, how to play, guessing game, clue, ask S.O to do st Structure : Question word before to infinitives 2. Skills: Writing, Speaking, Reading, Listening. 3. Education factor: The Ss understand and love some famous world landmarks II. Teachers and studentspreparation: 1. Method: Communicative approach 2.Techniques: Matching, pairwork, 20 questions; .. 3. Teaching aids : picture, chart, extra board, tape 4. Studentspreparation: some famous world landmark. 5. Previous exercise: exercises (workbook) III. Procedure in class: 1.Stabilization:(2ms) - Hangs the pictures of 4 famous places:stonehenge; Sydney Opera House; Ha Long Bay. - Asks Ss what it was & where it was - Asks Ss to match the name of these famous world landmarks to the correct pictures. 2. Checking up: Questions: Calls students to correct exercises. Keys to questions: IV . New lessson Teachers activities 1. Lead in :5 - From stabilization says about the pyramids & leads to the topic wonder of the word & the lesson Listen & read 2. Pre-practice : 10 Students activities - Listen & know

a)-Teaches some words landmark place of interest how to play => translation guessing game => Ss guess clue (n) key words ask S.O to do st Ex: He asks us to open our books b) Checking: Rub out remember c) Introduces the grammar point: * Question word + to- inf Modal sentence: I dont know how to play it S V Q to inf word Concept checking: Form: S V Question word to-inf Eg: I dont know how I can play . 3.Controlled practice:13 Asks the Ss to answer what kinds of language game do you often play? - Introduces the situation Nga, Nhi and Hoa are playing some language games - Asks them to listen the tape & find out the game, the rules of the game ( Listen twice) - Gets Ss answer and asks them to open their books to check - Asks Ss to practise the dialogue in pairs (groups of three) - Gets some pairs to present the dia - Asks them to read the dialogues silently, completeting the summary

- Listen, repeat, guese the worlds meaning then copy down

- Rub out & remember - Take notes

- Answer - Listen and know - Listen to - Gives feedback - Check in the book - Practice in pairs - Present the dia - Read sitently &do the exercise 1.game 5.America 2.place 6.golden 3.clue 7.right 4.VN 8.was

- Calls one to read the complete summary out - Gives correction 4.Free practice:10 - Asks the Ss to play the game 2.0 questions - Asks the Ss to match the place to country A 1. Jaf Mahal 2. Great wall of China 3. Angkor wat 4. Petronas Tuin Towers 5. Great Barrier Rief 6. Fiffel Tower B a. Cambodia b. Australia c. Malaysia

- Play the game - Do the matching

d. France e. China f. India - Gets feedback and corrects.

- Copy down

Date of preparation: January 7, 2012 Date of teaching: January 10, 2012 Lesson 1 : Getting started +Listen and read I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss can know what they would do in the situation which require first - aid II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: - Future simple with will / shall - Making requests, offers and requests using modal will 2. Vocabulary: bleed, conscious, burn, emergency, promise, sting, wound, ambulance 3. Skills : L - S - R - W III. Techniques: - Matching, slap the board, work pair / group IV. Teaching aids: Poster , cassette , picture V. Procedures : 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Check up : No 1. Lead in: (getting started)(5) - Uses some read objects and asks them what these things are used for - Introduces four situations in the book - Asks the Ss to work in pairs to discuss what would you do in these situations - Calls some pairs to both speak out & acts - Gives correction - Asks if the Ss are in these situation and what they would do - Introduces as emergency in the dialogue 2. Pre-practice: (10) a)- Asks the Ss to close their books and listen to the dialogue & answer Whos talking ? Where are they ? What happened ? - Lets the Ss listen 2 times - Calls some to answer - Asks them to open their books & check b) Pre- teaches new words. emergency (n) ambulance (n) hurt (v) situation & example: My hand is hurt Students activities Unit 9 : Period : 55

- Have a look & answer for giving first aid - Listen - Discuss in pairs - Both act and speak - Listen - Answer - Listen & know

- Book closed, listen & answer (2 times) - Listen two - Answer - Check book opend - Listen, repeat, guess the words meaning and then copy down

Calm down- Translation Conscious (a) explanation Bleed bled bled Put pressure on it Situa hold it tight Ex Asleep (a) awake (a) c) Checks Ss understanding (slap the board) d) Teaches (review) +The simple future : S+will/shall+V(b-inf) 3. Controlled- practice: 14 - Has the Ss listen to the tape once more - Asks them to work in pairs, practising the dia - Calls some pairs to speak - Asks them to read the dia silently then select the topics covered the dia - Gets feedback & corrects 4.Free- practice: 10 - Gets the Ss to work in groups one gives an action; others give first - aid instructions - Calls some to act out, the left give first aid instruction - Gives correction & marks if one gives good ideas - Asks Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue - Tells ss to begin their story with: Yesterday there was an emergency at 5.Consolidation 3 - Guides them to give first aids for these again 6. Homework: (2ms) - Asks the Ss to take notes Rewrite what you have just discussed on your notebook Learn by heart some ways of doing first aid Do exercise 1,2 (work book)

- Slap the board

- Listen to the tape - Do pairwork, practising the dia - Answer: a,b,c,e,f - Listen - Do the require ment in groups - Some act out other give first - aid instructions - Listen

- Listen

Prepare Speak + Listen


? 6. Self evaluation: .............................................................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: January 7, 2012 Date of teaching: January 11, 2012 Unit 9 : Period :56

Lesson 2 : Speak

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss can make and respond to requests, offers and promises II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: use: can, could, will, would to make requests offers, promise.

- I hope so, that would be nice - Review Present progressive tense, Present simple tense 2. Vocabulary: Review 3. Skills : S - L - R - W III. Techniques: - Asking and Answering, pair work, brainstorming matching, what and where IV.Teaching aids: - Projector , Picture V.Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance : 1 2. New lesson Teachers activities * Check up : 5 T asks ss some questions: - Where is Lan? - What was wrong with her friend? - Is she conscious? - What does the nurse tell Lan to do? 1. Lead in: 5 - Sets a situation & gives example Ex:I have a headache.Could yougive/get me some aspirins ? => a request - Introduses the aim of the lesson 2. Pre-practice: 10 a)Asks about the modal verb will and gives questions - I want you to get me a bandage. How can I say? - Id like to come to my party. How can I say? - I tell my brother that Ill surely finish my work before bedtime. How can I say? Modal: Will you get me a bandage, please ? =>Asking S.O to do st (a request) Ill help you bring this suit case => a help I promise Ill do the homework => a promise b)Asks the Ss to look at the table then listen to the explanation * Requests : Can Could you please+Vb-inf ? Will Would Responses : Sure Ok Im sorry I cant / * Offers : Would you like..? Shall I ? Students activities S . Answer _ (Quang Trung school) - (she fell off her bike and hit her head on the road. She had a bad cut on her head and its bleeding quite badly) - (No) - (stop the bleeding, use a towel or a handkerchief to cover the wound, then put pressure on it and hold it tight) - Listen

- Listen & guess - Listen & answer

- A request - A help - A promise - Listen & takenotes

What can I do / get for you? Can I get you.? Responses : Yes, please That would be nice No, thank you * Promises : I will.. I promise I promisse Ill. I promise to Reponses : I hope so Good Im glad Dont forget c)Lets the Ss see the situation in picture (a) (a girl has a cut on her arm she asks the man for a request) - Explains the situation as an example - Asks them to look at the left and asks if they know what happened 3. Controlled - practice: 13 - Asks the Ss to work in pairs, giving requests, offers or promises - Calls some pairs to speak out - Gives correction Suggestion: Picture (b) - Can I get you some medicine/ water ? -Yes, please/ That would be nice/ . or + Would/ Can you get me some medicine ? + Sure 4.Free practice: 8 - Asks the Ss to do group work one gives on action that shows he needs a help then the others answer (or he asks for a request) - Calls some to act out and some to answer

- Study the situation in the books (picture (a)) - Listen & know - Give request, offers or promises in pairs - Speak out - Listen - Listen & take notes

- Work in groups

5/Consolidation 2 - Asks the Ss to recall some structures of giving requests, offers & promises - Recall - Asks about the meaning of some words relating to hospitals - Answer 6. Homework: (1ms) - Asks the Ss to copy down learn alt the structures & words by heart Do exercise 6/57; 7/58 Prepare Lsten +Vocabulary +What would you do with a person in cases of a fainting; a shock or burns 6. Self evaluation: ..............................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................. Date of preparation: January11, 2012 Date of teaching: January 13, 2012 Unit 9 : Period :57 Lesson 2 : Listen I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss can : - Listen to a paragraph for details the activities taking place in an emergency room. II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: - Review Present progressive tense, Present simple tense 2. Vocabulary: stretcher, crutches, wheelchair, scale, eyes chart 3. Skills : L - S - R - W III. Techniques: - Asking and Answering, pair work, brainstorming , matching, what and where IV.Teaching aids: - Projector V.Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance : 1 2. New lesson Teachers activities Students activities

* Check up 5 Ss make requests, offers, promises: Ss answers


1. Lead in: 5 - From the situations about, questions What would you do if the situation were bad ? What things do we need in these cases ? - Introduces the point by asking them to look at the picture & guess 2. Pre-listening: 10 a)Teaches Paramedis (n) nurse eyesight (n) wheel (n) => picture patient (n) => explanation consite of (v) induele (v) lean (v) explanation & action b)Checks : Rub out & remember c)Explains the requrement of the listening 3. While- listening : 15 a)Asks the Ss to listen & match the words with the letter in the pictures - Has the Ss listen twice - Has them check the answer with their partners - Calls some to answer & corrects

- Do as the require-ment - Taking to the hospital - Answer I would ..... - Listen, guess the meaning, then repeat after the teacher

- Listen & repeat - Listen - Listen & match - Listen to the tape - Checks the answer in pairs - Give anwers A; what is an ambulance used for ? B: Its used for taking a patient to the hospital - Listen & answer

b)- Asks the Ss to listen for the last and rearrange the words in the order as they appear in the

- Asks and answer

listening A:What is an ambulance used for? - Calls 2 to answer & corrects B: It is used for.... 4.Post - listening : 9 - Speak out - Asks the Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer : What is an ambulance / a stretcher/ ..used for ? - Recall - Calls some to speak out & corrects - Answer III/Consolidation 4 - Asks the Ss to recall contents in the listening - Asks about the meaning of some words relating to hospitals 4. Homework: (1ms) -Do exercises in workbook. - Asks the Ss to copy down Prepare Read +Vocabulary +What would you do with a person in cases of a fainting; a shock or burns 6. Self evaluation: .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. Date of preparation: January 15, 2012 Date of teaching: January 17, 2012 Unit 9 : Period 58 I .Objectives:

Lesson 3 . Read

Reading for the instructions about some more situations requiring first-aid. II. Language content: 1. Grammar: in order to / so as to 2. Vocabulary: lie flat, elevate, lower, victim, overheat, tissue damage, ease. 3. Skills : R - W - S - L
III. Techniques:

Scanning for details, bingo, matching


IV. Teaching aids: Text books, poster

V. Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance : 1 2. New lesson:


Teachers activities Students activities

* Check up 5 Ss make requests, offers, promises: Ss answers


1. Lead in: 5 Have you ever been in case af an emergency ? Have you ever give first aid to others ? How many cases of emergency do you know ? - Introduces the aims of the lesson

- Answer Yes/ no

- Listen, guess the words meaning repeat

2. Pre-reading: 10 - Teaches some words elevate (v) lower (v) action victim (n) explanation Revive (v) Overheat (v) explanation Minimize Sterile (a) explanation Sterilize (v) b) Checks : Blank fill 1.the pictients feet or..his head below the level of the heart 2.cannot drink wine or beer . 3.Dont use blankets or coats to ..the victime 4.. the cut, burned ares with a thick dressing - Teaches grammar note - Asks ss elicit the answer A: Why should we cool the burn immediately ? B: We should do it so as to / in order to minimize the tissue damage. Form: so as to + V binf In order to Use: to indicate purpose c) Asks if the Ss know which case the situation are in d) Explains the requirement of the reading 3. Controlled- practice: 10 - Asks the Ss to read the text sitently, answer the questions In fainting case/shok, what do you not to do ? Why do we use a thick sterile dressing to cover the burned area ? - Gets some to answer & corrects - Asks them to choose a correct case for each treatment - Gets Ss feedback & corrects 4.Post-reading: 10 - Gets the Ss to work in pairs what will you do then a) a you get burns b) a person get shocked c) you have a dog bite d) you get out - Gets some pairs to speak out & corrects - From Ss to speak and act out some cases 5/Consolidation 2 - Write the modal on the board and asks the Ss to practice asking and answering the question using own words Modal: A:Why? B: .. in order to / so as to. 6. Homework: (2ms) - Asks the Ss to take notes list out some cases of emergency & the way to give first aid Do exercise 2/55 (work book)

- Do exercise 1. levate/ Lower 2.Victims 3.Overheat 4. Sterile - Answer

- Takenote - Listen

- Read silently, then answer

- Speak out - Choose the corret one - Give out the answers - Asks and answer in pairs

- Speak out - Listen - Listen - Copy down

Prepare write How to write a thank you note 6. Self evaluation: .............................................................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: January 15, 2012 Date of teaching: January 18, 2012 Unit 9 : Period 59

Lesson 4 Write

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a thank you note to a friend II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: Present simple (review) 2. Vocabulary: review 3. Skills : III.Techniques: Ask and answer IV.Teaching aids: Poster V.Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson

Teachers activities * Check up:5 Ss say the treatments for fainting, shock and burns. ( in lesson READ) 1. Lead in:4 - Sets situation and example Your friend sent you a very be beautiful present for your birthday party. What will you do if he/she is far from you ? - Questions : Whats a thank you letter ? When do we write it ? Have you ever sent it? Received a thank you letter ? - Gets Ss answer introduces the aims of the leson 2. Pre-writing: 10 - Asks the Ss to complete the letter in the books - Gets the Ss to compare the answer with their friends - Calls 2 to read the letter out - Gives correction & questions What did Hoa send Nga ? On what occasion ? What were they like ?

Students activities

- Listen and answer Write a thank you note

- Listen & know - Complete the letter - Check with their friend - Read out - Answer Hoa sent Nga flowers

How did she feel when she receives the present ? ....... How does Nga feel now Where will Nga invite Hoa to do ? How will she contact Hoa ? - Get Ss answer & corrects - Take note * correction: Hoa sent Nga flowers During Nga was in the hospital They ............ - Answer - Asks the Ss to answer the questions in the books - Have a look at the letter and the questions - Asks the Ss to look at the letter as the model, then write a letter based on the questions above (in books) - Do the requisement 3. While- writing: 15 - Has the Ss write a thank you note based on questions (in - Discuss the letter in pairs books) and the model - Write the letter on the board - Has them discuss the letters in pairs - Calls some to write on the board - Gives correction - Write a letter in their imagine 4.Post- writing: 5 - Asks the Ss to write another letter to another friend for - Listen & write another occations - Goes round & encourages them to write the letter - Answer 5/Consolidation 3 - Calls some to answer again What is a thank you note ? When do we write it ? 6. Homework: (2ms) - Asks the Ss to take notes Write the 2 letters (in while & post writing) on your notebooks Prepare Language focus *Phrases of purpose *Future simple & Modal Will 6. Self evaluation: ..............................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: January 29, 2012 Date of teaching: January 31, 2012 Unit 9 : Period :60

Lesson :6 Language Focus

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use in order to and so as to to indicate purposes, make and respond to requests, offers and promises. II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: -Use can, could, will, would to make requests, offers, and promise. - Review future simple. - In order to, so as to. 2. Vocabulary: review 3 . Skills : R - W - S - L III. Techniques:

Speaking, Writing, Completing IV. Teaching aids: Pictures, Books, Real objects V.Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Check up:5 T checks Ss letters. I. Phases of purpose : 15 1. Lead in: Questions: Why do you go to school ? Because I want to get better knowledge => I go to school to get better pharase of purpose - Introduces the aims of the point 2. Pre-practice: - Asks about the form To infinitive In order to + b-inf e So as to => Purpose - Explains the requirement of exercise 1 Model : I always keep the window open in order to / so as to let fresh air in 3. Controlled- practice : - Has the Ss match one part in column A with another in column B - Has them check the answer with their partners - Calls some to speak out the whole sentence - Gives correction 1f, 2c, 3b, 4e, 5a, 6d. 4.Free- practice: - Gets the Ss to make sentences with in order to, so as to - Gets some to write their sentences on the bb II. Future simple : 10 1.Lead in : - Sets situation & question what will you do tomorrow? - Gets the answer and introduces the point 2.Pre practice : - Asks the Ss to recall the form usage of the simple future a)Form: S + will/ shall + V (b- infi) S + will/shall + not +V(b-inf) Will/ shall + S + V(b-inf)? b)Usage : - Expreses an action that will happen in a certain time - Expresses as guess - Explains the requirement of the exercise 3. Controlled- practice : - Has the Ss do the exercise individually - Has them check the answer with their partners - Calls some to speak out & corrects Students activities

- Answer

- Listen - Answer : recall the form

- Listen & take note

- Do the requirement - Speak out - Listen and take note - Make sentence individually - Write on the bb - Listen - Answer - Recall - Take note

- Do the exercise individually ,check the answer - Speak out

4. Free- practice : - Has them tall about what they will do before Tet - Calls some to speak out & corrects III. Modal- will :9 1. Lead- in : - Sets the situation & example will you close the window for me ? - Introduces the point 2. Pre- practice : - Asks the Ss to recall a request Modal Will an offer a promise - Gets them to make some examples in each case 3. Controlled practice : a) Reads the intructions and asks the Ss to work in pairs to complete the sentences - Has the pairs change the answer together - Calls some pairs to speak out (d,e,f) and calls some Ss to read sentences b,c b)Gives example and asks the Ss to make requests,offers or promises Eg: Will you empty the garbage can, please ? - Has them work in pairs, making requests, offers or promises depending on the pictures - Calls some pairs to speak out loud - Gives correction 4. Free- practice : - Gets the Ss to make more requests with these situations ( action) - Gets some pairs to speak out & corrects 5/Consolidation 3 - Uses a chart- Blank fill 1.People use cold water. the pain 2.you give me a cup of tea please ? 3.She willthere in 2 hours 4.Its dark herethe window, please? 5.II wont be late for school

- Discuss in groups - Speak out - Listen & guess

- Recall will to make requests, offers and promises

- Complete the sentences in pairs - Change the answers in pairs - Speak out - Take notes - Pair work - Speak out - Take note - Look at the pictuces & make requests, offers or promises - Speak out - Fill in the blank 1.to/in order to/ do as to 2.Will/ can/ could would 3.Be 4.Will/ can /could /would you open 5.Promise

6. Homework: (2ms) - Asks the Ss to copy down Do the 4 exercises again Do exercise 5,6,7 (57,58) Prepare Unit 10 (Getting started & Listen & read) 6. Self evaluation: ..............................................................................................................................................................................

Date of teaching: Date of teaching:

January 30, 2012 February 1, 2012

Lesson1 :Getting Started + Listen and Read I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to do something to protect the environment and save natural recourses II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: Adj + to inf . / noun phrase Passive Modal verbs : should , can (revision ) 2. Vocabulary: - representative, protect, natural resources, recycle, contact 3. Skills: L - S - R - W III. Techniques: - True / False - Brainstorm , what and where IV. Teaching aids: Text books, a cassette player V. Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Check up:5 T presents the picture a in Language focus 4 and has two Ss make request or offer and give respond. A: Will you empty the garbage can, please? B: All right. - Listen Students activities

UNIT 10 Period 61

- Discuss the question in pairs 1.Lead in : (Getting started ) 5 - Sets the situation and questions What should/ shouldnt we do to reduce the amount of garbage ? - Has the Ss work in pairs to discuss about this - Cues : wrapthings Free leaves make fertiliser Garbage - Speak out loud Garden waster Jin cans Make toys Paper - Calls some to speak out loud Introduces the Friends of the Earth - Asks about the word Recycling them introduce the dialogue 2. Pre-practice: 10 - Listen, repeat guess the wordsmeaning a)-Teaches some words then copy down Reduce

Reuse explanation Recycle Overpackage (v) instead of Ex: We should reuse cloth bags instead of (recycling) plastic bags Product (n) Representative(n)->explanation Protect (v) => explanation Throw thew thrown => action b)Checking : Blank fill 1.We can.this thin can to make a toy. 2.They.the garbage and make it into paper 3.You should.the enviromment .producing much garbage 4means not buying products which are c)Gives examples: then introduces the 2 structures * Adj + To infinitive Noun clause Ex : Its difficult to say the truth Im pleased that you can do the test *Passive form : Be + PP Ex: Nam opens the door The door is opened by Nam 3. Controlled- practice : 12 *Guiding question: What does Miss Blake tell the students ? - Has the Ss listen twice - Gets them to practise the dialogue in groups of four - Asks the Ss to change the role - Calls 2 pairs to speak out d)Asks them to read the dia silently, then answer the questions (book page.91) - Gets them to check the answer with their partners - Calls some to answer 4.Free- practice: 8 - Asks the Ss to work in groups of four; one is a representative fromFriends of the Earth, the others are Ss from Phuoc Lan school : Make a convevsation - Asks them to list out the things that can be reduced, reused and recycled - Calls some groups (Ss) to speak out loud then corrects - Calls some to answer What does recycling mean ? 5/Consolidation 3 - Recalls some says to reduce the garbage 6. Homework: (1ms) - Asks the Ss to copy down Reread the dialogue at home List out some ways to reduce the amount of garbage we produce everyday

- Do exercise 1.Reuse 2.Recycle 3.Protect/instead of 4.Reduce/ovepackaged - Listen, guess the take notes

=>Elicit the form

- Answer - Book opened

- Speak out - Read silenly, answer

- One is a representative from Friends of the Earth, these others are Ss (for the good class) - List out the things (for the average Ss)

- Answer - Recall

Do exercises 1,2 (page 59) Prepare speak + Listen 6. Self evaluation: .............................................................................................................................................................................. Date of preparation: February 1, 2012 Date of teaching: February 3, 2012 UNIT 10 Period 62

Lesson 2 : Speak And Listen

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students practice in giving and responding to instructions - To help Ss practice in listening for specific information about making compost II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: present simple and future simple 2. Vocabulary: leather, metal, food / drinking can, compost, heap, shade, shovel, moisture, condensation 3. Skills : L - S - R - W III. Techniques: - Memory game (Kims game) . IV.Teaching aids : - Pictures text books, a cassette player V.Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Check up: 5 Ss think and tell the ways to reduce the amount of garbage. Ex. We should use cloth bags instead of plastic bags. I. SPEAK :19 1. Lead- in: - Uses the picture in the books to introduce the situation : What do we call these ? Do we have to group/ classify these things ? why? 2. Pre-practice: - Has the Ss look at the pictures - Asks them to classify the things - Calls some to speak out & corrects Paper : Paper, old/ used newspaper,books, cardboard boxes, Glass : bottles, glasses, micrors Pastic : plastic bags/ bottles/ combs/ wares Metal :Food cans, drinking cans, tins Vegetable matter : Fruit , vegetables Fabric : clothes, pieces of materials Students activities

- Look at the picture and answer -Yes =>To reuse & recyde - Look at the picture & find out - Pay attention to the dialogues - Repeat in chorus

Leather : Shoes, sandals schoolbags, - Helps the Ss make 2 model dialogues *A :Which group do shoes belong to ? B : Put them in leather A :What can we do with those thing ? B :We can recycle them and make them into new ones *A :Are clothes fabric? B :Thats right A :What will we do with them ? B :We make theminto paper or shopping bags ? - Gets them to read the two dialogues in chorus 3. Controlled - practice : - Asks the Ss to work in pairs making other new dialogues based on the model - Gets some pairs to speak out loud -Corrects the pronunciation, intonation 4. Free - practice: - Asks the Ss to what can we do with other kinds of garbage ? Model : What can we do with food cans ? We can recycle them and make it into new one/ make toys . - Gets some pairs to speak out & corrects II. LISTEN : 15 1.Lead- in : Question:How do you make compost ? Says & introduces An expert in argriculture is explaining how to make compost 2. Pre-listening : - Gets the Ss to guess how to make compost in groups 1.What kind of garbage can we put in the compost ? 2.Where is the best place for a compost heap 3.Should you water the compost ? 4. How long does it take before you can use the compost - Has the Ss look at the exercise then explains how to do it 3. While - listening : - Has the Ss listen for the 1st time - Asks them to listen for the 2rd time them and check the correct answers - Gets Ss answer after getting them to check the answers with their friends - Plays the cassette for the last, then asks them to check 4. Post- listening : - Lets them work in groups to summarize how to make compost - Calls one to speak out loud & corects 5. Consolidation 3 - From Ss summary recalls the way to make compost - Notices the way to classify things by groups to reuse or recycle 6. Homework: (2ms) - Asks the Ss to take notes +Make a summary about how to make the compost

- Make dialogues in pairs

- Speak out loud - Discuss, practice the questions in pairs - Speak out - Answer

- Take notes

- Listen - Work in groups, guessing how to make compost

- Read the exercise - Listen for the 1st, 2nd time - Choose the best one - Listen & check - For the excellent - speak out loud -Listen - Copy down

+Do exercise 3 (page 60 Work book) +Prepare read preread some recycling facts then find the new words 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................................... Date of preparation: February 1, 2012 Date of teaching: February 3, 2012 UNIT 10 Period 63 Lesson 3 : Read

I. Objectives: Reading for details about how things are recycled. II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: Passive form (present simple) 2. Vocabulary: tire, pipe, deposit, refill, melt. 3. Skills : R - W - S - L III. Techniques: Questions And Answers, Scanning for details, word square IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, cassette, transparency, flash cards V. Procedures:
1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson:

Teachers activities * Check up:5 T uses the questions in the LISTEN part of the Unit to ask ss - What type of garbage can you put in the compost? - Where is the best place for a compost heap? - Should we water the compost? - How long does it take before we can use the compost? 1. Lead- in: 5 Questions: a. Do you often read newspaper ? b. What about the papers written for the environment - Introduces the green gazette & asks more questions What do preople do with used things ? What can we make from them ? - Gets Ss answer & introduces the point 2. Pre-reading : 10 - Teaches some words: Nowadays (adv)

Students activities

- (all vegetable matter) - (a place that gets sun and shade) - (yes, we should water it) - (six months) - Listen and answer

- Listen & know - Answer

- Listen, repeat, guess the words meaning then take notes

Bring (v) brought brought.to Refill (v) (fill) Break broke broken (action) Eg: Every morning the milkman brings bottle of milk to my houses. Glassware: things made of glass Deposit/ dipazzt/ (explanation) Fertilize (v): ( action) Fertilizer (n) : dung (n) melt (v) ( translation) - Do as required - Checking :Match the words with its meaning or its form of words - Recall - Asks the Ss to recall the passive voice S + tobe + Vpp+ (by O) Eg: Millions of old cars are thrown away every year - Look at the example & know (by people) Tires can be recycled to make pipes and floor coverings =>Passive voice in the present S + be + pp + by + O *Modal V : S + Modal + be + pp + by + O *By + them/ people/ everyone/ you him; me; can be omitted *Adv : S + be + Vpp + adv of place + by + O + Adv of time S + be + adv of manner + pp + by + O - Gets Ss to give make example 3. While- reading : 12 a) Gets the Ss read the recycling facts silently then answer the questions (in book p.93) - Gets them to check the answers in pairs - Gets Ss answers & corrects b)Asks the ss to make a list of recycled things in pairs - Calls some Ss to write on the bb Ex: Car tires are recycled to make pipes and floor coverings .. 4.Post- reading : 8 - Asks the Ss to listen & find out some ways of recycling (Reads some paragraph about recycling) - Calls some to speak out the answer & corrects - Asks the Ss to find the things that can be recycled - Calls some to read out loud - Gives correction and marks 5.Consolidation 3 - Asks the Ss to close their books & match the sentences with its topic A(topic) 1.Car tires 2.Bottles - Read silently answer - Check the answer with their friends Read the text again, making lists of recycled things by completing sentences - Elicit the form

-Listen & find out - Speak out - For the excellent student

- Match -a 3 b 1 c 2

3.Glass 4.Drink cans 5.Compost B a. It is broken up melted & made into new glassware b. they can be recycled to make pipes & floor coverings c. they are cleaned & reused 6. Homework: (1m) - Asks the Ss to copy down Do 2 exercises again Do exercise 4/62 (work book) Prepare write - How to make paper - How to prepare the dry tea leaves 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................. .

Date of preparation: February 6, 2012 Date of teaching: February 8, 2012

UNIT 10 Period 64

Lesson 2 : Write

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand and write the instructions of making something. II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: verbs and sentences for instructions. 2.Vocabulary : soak , mash , wire mesh ,bucket , wrap , mix ,press . 3. Skills : R - W - S - L III. Techniques: ask and answer, slap the board .chatting. IV. Teaching aids: Pictures (copied and enlarged from textbook), cassette tape + recorder V. Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance 1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities 1. Lead- in: 5 - Uses an old newspaper and asks : Whats this ? Should I throw it away? What can we do with it? Do you know how to recycled paper? - Listen - Answer Students activities

- Listen & know

- Gets Ss answer & introduces the lesson 2. Pre-writing : 12 - Teaches some words soak (v) (action) mash (v) (mime) mix (v) (action) wrap (v) (action) bucket (n) (drawing) dry (v) (action) scatter(v) place (v) - Checks Ss understanding ( uses actions, mimes and drawing pictures ) * Ordering prediction: - Give some pictures about how to recycle paper, but the pictures are in-order. - Asks the Ss to work in pair to re-ordering them. - Gets feedback and corrects - Gives some verbs then asks Ss to put the suitable verd below each picture Soak dry place mix press mash wrap wait pull out use - Gets feedback and corrects - Hangs the extra board with the uncomplete instruction how to recycle used paper, asks Ss to complete it using the verds and the pictures above. - Gets feedback and corrects - Answer keys: 1. use. 2. mix. 3. place. 4. press. 5. wrap. 6. wait. 7. dry - Asks one to read the complete instruction. - Asks Ss to read the instruction again and answer: * How many steps are there in the instruction? - Gets the answer and give the way to write the instruction - First/ firstly,... - Second/secondly/ Then,... - Third/ Thirdly/Next ... - Finally,... 3. While- writing : 15 - Give tea and asks What is it? What can we do with tea? - Says to lead the exercise 2 (how to make tea leaves to keep mosquitoes away) - Hangs the picture of making tea leaves - Asks Ss to look at each picture and give the suitable verds for each picture - Gets feedback

- Listen, guess the words meaning then take notes

- Do the requirement - Look at the pictures - Do the exercise in pair - Take note - Put the verds under the picture

- Give feedback - Read and complete - Take notes

- Read the instruction - Answer - Answer

- Answer

- Look at the picture & do the requirement - Write the instruction in groups

- Has the Ss look at the pictures and write the instructions on - Have a look & correct how to prepare the tea leaves using the given words in the box in groups on mini board - Collects Sswriting and hangs them on the bb - Take notes - Gives correction 2. First, take the used tea leaves from the tea pot. 3. Next, scatter the tea leaves on the tray 4. Then, dry the leaves in the sun 5. Finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for future use. 4.Post- writing : 10 - Asks Ss to close their books . - Asks Ss to work in pairs on do action and another gives instruction about how to make dry tea leaves to keep - Pairwork mosquitoes away. - Write the sequencing on the board and have Ss to practice speaking how to recycle used paper how to recycle used paper from memory. First,.. Second,.. Third, . Finally, .. 5. Homework: (2ms) - Asks the Ss to take notes Write exercise 2 again on their notebooks Learn new words by heart Prepare Language Focus - Passive voice -Adj + to inf N clause 6. Self evaluation: ........................................................................................................................................................... ..... Date of preparation: February 8, 2012 Date of teaching: February 10, 2012

UNIT 10 Period 65

Lesson 5 : Language Focus 1,2

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to form the passive and in expressing their feelings using Adjectives II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: Passive in future simple / passive forms Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause 2. Vocabulary: review 3. Skills : R- L - S - W III. Techniques: - Read, write, rearrange pictures, gap- fill

IV. Teaching aids: - Real objects: an apple, a hat, text books V. Procedures: 1. Greeting and taking attendance1 2. New lesson: Teachers activities * Check up 5 Ss make the instructions on how to prepare the tea leaves to dry them to keep mosquitoes away. Ex. First, take the used tea leaves from the tea pot. I. Passive forms: 1. Lead- in: 5 - Asks the Ss Who teaches you Math? Math is taught by Mr Binh - Corrects & introduces the points 2. Pre-practice : 15 - From the example above, asks the Ss to draw out the way to change on active sentence into a passive voice S + V + O Students activities

- Answer: Mr Binh -Compare the form meaning of the 2 sentences - Listen -Elicit

S + be + pp + by + O - Present simple S + is/am/are+Vpp +by+ O - Future simple / Modal V Will S + shall +be+Vpp+by+ O Can Notes : By people / someone/ you / them/ can be omited 3. Controlled- practice:: 15 a)-Asks all to read the sentences in exercise 1 - Has them rewrite in passive form - Calls some to write on the bb - Leaves 2 minutes, asks the Ss to look at the picture then re-order the sentences - Gives correction a-1; b-4; c-3; d-5; e-2; f-6 b)- Introduces the situation - Asks the Ss to supply the correct verb forms - Gets Ss feedback - Has them to work in pairs practising the dialogue - Calls some pairs to speak out loud - Read silently - Write the sentences in passive form - Rearrange the sentences

-Listen & know - Pairwork - Speak out

4.Free- practice : 3 - Look at the example & know - Asks the Ss to work in groups, telling about a the process of doing something - Talk - Calls some representatives to speak out & corrects 5. Homework: 1 - Asks the Ss to take notes Do exercise 5,6,7,8 (page 62 =>65 work book) Prepare unit 10 L. Focus 3,4 6. Self evaluation: ................................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparation: January,18th , 2011. Date of teaching: January, 20th , 2011

WEEK: 1 Date of preparation: August,21st ,2011 Date of teaching : August,23rd ,2011


Period 1 HNG DN CCH HC A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Be accustomed to the subject. - Practice some phrases about classroom managements used during the years.

- Know the syllabus of English 6 and understand how to learn it. - Have good attitude in learning English. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: some sentences used in class. 2. Grammar: some sentences used in class. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chatting, slap the board, rub out and remember D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 43 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (No) Warm-up (3 minutes) * Chatting: - Answer. - Ask Ss some questions related to personal information. New lesson (1 minute) - Listen - Introduce the new lesson. Activity 1 (10 minutes) - Introduce the syllabus of English 6. - Open the books and listen and remember. + S tit trong ton nm hc v trong mi hc k. + S bi hc + S bi kim tra + Cu trc sch Activity 2 (10 minutes) - Guide Ss how to learn English in best way. + In class + At home + Practice + Pay attention Activity 3 (13 minutes) - Ask Ss to remember some classroom managements *Some classroom managements + Good morning class + Good morning teacher/ Mr.. + Good bye..+ work in pairs + work in groups + stand up + sit down + open your books + close your books + listen to me + keep silent + dont talk + Again - Guide Ss to reread the words above. * Rub out and remember: - Guide Ss to play with classroom managements above. Activity 4 (4 minutes) * Slap the board: - Give the meaning in Vietnamese on the board - Guide Ss to play. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson: + Book, How to learn + Give some advice to Ss Homework (1 minute): - Learn class managements by heart. - Listen and take note.

- Listen and remember. - Repeat and read.

- Do as teachers guide.

- Play as teachers guide. - Listen and remember.

- Prepare unit 1: A1, A2, A3, A4. F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: August,21st ,2011 Date of teaching: August,24th ,2011


UNIT 1: GREETINGS Period 2 Lesson 1: A1, A2, A3, A4 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Greet people. - Introduce the name. - Greet and make friends with others. - Have good attitude when meeting others, know how to greet people around them. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (v): am, is (a): my (pro): I (n): name (interj): hello, hi 2. Grammar: - TOBE: am, is - structure: I am/ Im, my name is../ my names. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chatting, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities *Check up: (3mins) : Ask Two Ss to talk about how to learn English. Warm-up (3 minutes) * Chatting: - Answer. - Ask Ss some questions: + Khi em gp mt ngi gi em cho th no? + Em cho th no khi gp mt ngi cha quen? New lesson(1 minute) -Listen Ts introduction. - Lead in the topic of unit 1. - Listen - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation (11 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures: + Hello, Hi (interj): ( situation) + I (pro): ( Example) + My (adj): ( explanation) + Name (n): (example) + Am/ Is (v): ( example, translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Guess the meaning of the new words.

- Repeat, read in chorus and then in individuals.

* Rub out and remember: - Ask Ss to read the words above aloud. - Do as teachers guide. - Rub out the new word one at a time. - Rub out English words and point to the Vietnamese translation and ask, What is this in English?

- When all the new words are rubbed out, go through the Vietnamese list and get Ss to call the English words. * Introduce the new item. - Introduce the name: + I am/ Im + name. + My names/ my name is + name - Greet people: Hello: used in common ways. Hi: used for the friends in the same age. Practice (13 minutes) - Play the tape two times the content of A1, A3 - Ask Ss to read A1 in pairs, A3 before class the dialogue in pairs. - Correct Ss pronunciation. * Chain game: - Ask Ss to greet their friends in chain reaction. Eg: S1: Hello, Hung S2: Hello, Hung, Hi, Nga - Correct Ss pronunciation. Production (10 minutes) * Group show: - Device class into many groups and name many kinds of flowers. - Ask Ss to work in groups in 4 or 6 Ss to introduce by themselves. - Ask each group to introduce name of them. - Correct. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson: + How to greet to people + How to introduce the name. Homework (1 minute): - Do exercises A1 in workbook. - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Greet people in your family - Prepare A5,A6, A7, A8

- Listen, speak and take note.

- Listen to the tape - Read A1 in pairs, A3 before class. - Play the game

- Work in groups of 4 or 6 and introduce to others. - Introduce name of each group.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: August,24th ,2011 Date of teaching : August,26th ,2011


Period 3 UNIT 1: GREETINGS Lesson 2: A5, A6, A7, A8

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask how people are. - Thank to somebody. - Know how to greet other people. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (v): thank (a): how, fine (n): Mr, Mrs, miss (interj): thanks 2. Grammar: - TOBE: are

- structure: How are you? Im fine, thanks, and you? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Shark attack, pre- teach, dialogue build, picture drill, write it up, pair work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) . 3. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (3mins) : Ask Two Ss to greet others Warm-up (4 minutes) * Shark attack: - Draw a shark and steps of stairs and a girl. - Cross the short cues (____ _____ _____ ______ ) - Give a cue (Khi sinh ra ai cng c ci ny ) (name) - Play in 3 groups as teachers guide. - Ask Ss to guess the letter, if it is wrong, the girl will be down one step of the stairs. If the girl comes to the last step, the shark will eat her. - Ask Ss to play in groups. -Listen Ts introduction. - Give scores to each group. New lesson (1 minute) - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation (10 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures: - Guess the meaning of the new words + How (adj): (Translation) and structures + Fine (adj): ( explanation) + And (conj): (Example) + Are (v): (Synonym) + Thank(v): ( situation) + How are you? (situation) + Im fine. Thanks. And you? (situation) + Mr, Mrs, Miss (n): (Example- explanation) - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Repeat, read in chorus and then in * Dialogue build: individuals. - Play the tape one at a time suitable with sentence in A5 and - Listen and repeat write them on the board. - Pay attention. - Ask Ss to listen and remember after repeating. - Repeat and remember. - Write all of the dialogue on the board. - Guide Ss to read, understand the dialogue and rub out each sentence at one time. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue. - Read the dialogue in pairs. - Call some pairs to go to the board and read the dialogue loudly. Practice (14 minutes) * Picture drill: (A6- Page 12) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A6 and play roles, greeting - Look at A6 and make the similar and asking how people are. dialogues as A5 in pairs. - Guide Ss to make the same dialogue as A5, changing the names. - Present the dialogues loudly. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call some pairs to show the dialogues in front of the class. - Correct.

Production (10 minutes) * Write- it- up: - Ask Ss to look at A7 and complete the gaps and enlarge the dialogue as A5. - Call on some Ss to write the dialogue on the board. - Correct. Consolidation(2 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at A8 and listen to teachers brief explanation. - Ask Ss to ask and answer how to ask how their friends are. Homework (1 minute): - Do exercises A2,3,4 in workbook. - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Ask how people in family are. - Prepare B1,2,3,4

- Write the dialogue in individuals. - Write on the board.

- Listen and remember. - Ask and answer.

F/ Self- Evaluation: WEEK : 2

Date of preparation: August,28th ,2011 Date of teaching : August,30th ,2011


UNIT 1: GREETINGS Period 4 Lesson 3: B1, B2, B3, B4, B6 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Greet people in the day - Say goodbye. - Know how to greet other people in right time in a day. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (pro): We (n): children, mom (exp): good morning, good evening, good afternoon, good bye, bye, good night. 2. Grammar: Question with How 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: chatting, pre- teach, matching, role-play, gap- fill, pair, group work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities *Check up: (3mins) : Ask three Ss to introduce themselves Warm up ( 3 minutes) * Chatting: - Go to the board and practice with - Ask 2 pairs to greet and ask how others are before class. friends. - Correct and give marks. New lesson ( 1minute) - Listen Ts introduction. - Introduce the new lesson (how to greet other in the day)

Presentation (8 minutes) - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Introduce new words, structures: + Good morning, good afternoon, good evening, goodbye, good night, bye (exp): ( situation and example) + Children(n): ( example) + Mom(n): ( explanation) + How are you? We are (were) fine. - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. Practice ( 15 minutes) * Matching (B2- Page 15) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in B2 and English words below. - Ask Ss to talk about the content of 4 pictures. - Ask Ss to work in pairs (one show the picture, one read out the greeting) * Role- play: (B3, p15) - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to repeat in chorus. - Ask Ss to read the dialogues a) in groups and b) in pairs. -Call on some groups and some pairs to show before class. - Correct pronunciation. Production (11 minutes) * Gap- fill: (B4- p16) - Ask Ss to work in pairs completing the dialogue. - Have Ss to share the answers with a partner. - Call on some pairs to read the completed dialogue loudly. - Correct and give answer keys. * Answer keys: Lan: Good afternoon, Nga. Nga: Good afternoon, Lan. Lan: How are you? Nga: I am fine, thanks. and you? Lan: Fine, thanks. Nga: Goodbye. Lan: Goodbye. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at B6 on page 16 and listen to teachers brief explanation. Homework ( 1minute): - Do exercises B in workbook. - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Greet people in family. - Prepare C1,C2

- Repeat. - Guess the meaning of the new words and structures

- Repeat, read in chorus and then in individuals. - Look at the pictures and words. - Work in pairs. - Listen and repeat. - Work in pairs and groups. - Show loudly.

-Work in pairs. - Share the answers. - Read the dialogue loudly - Copy down.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: August,30th ,2011 Date of teaching : September , 1st , 2011


Period 5 UNIT 1: GREETINGS Lesson 4: C1, C2

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Count from zero to twenty. - Answer the age. - Learn the encouraged spirit in leaning. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: Numbers (cardinal numbers) (Exp): how old 2. Grammar: Question How old are you?- Im .years old 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Jumbled words, pre- teach, chain- game, slap the board, pair, group work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (3mins) : Ask some Ss to greet others. Warm up ( 3 minutes) * Jumbled words: - Pay attention. - Give some words in not order of the letters on the board. - Rearrange the letters. - Ask Ss to rearrange the words which have meaning. 1. mane: ( Name) 2. dogo nevenig (good evening) 3. ew ear (we are) New Lesson (1 minute) - Listen Ts introduction. - Introduce the new lesson (count from zero to twenty) Presentation (8 minutes) - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Repeat in chorus. - Introduce new words, structures: - Guess the meaning of the new + Number (n): (example) words and structures + Zero, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty. + How old (exp): ( explanation) + How old are you? I am (Im) + numbers. - Repeat, read in chorus and then in - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. individuals. Practice (16 minutes) * Role- play: (B2, p17) - Ask Ss to count from Zero to twenty in pairs. - Work in pairs, read the numbers. - Go around and help if necessary. - Read loudly. - Call on some Ss to read in front of the class. - Correct. - Ask others the age. - Ask Ss to ask their friends the age. * Chain- game: - Play the game as Ts guide. - Divide Ss to into three teams. - Guide Ss to play the game. T: one Group 1: One, Two Group 2: One, two, three Group 3: One, Two, Three, four Production ( 10minutes) * Slap the board: - Draw the circles with numbers on it. - Play as teachers guide. - Ask Ss to go to the board and stand at the same distance.

- call on in English numbers. - Ask 2 Ss above to run fast as possible to slap the number teacher said, the winner is the one who is faster and the most correct. Consolidation ( 2 minutes) - Ask Ss to read from Zero to twenty in chorus. Homework ( 1minute) - Do exercises C1 page 7 in workbook - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare C3, C4, C6

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: September , 4th , 2011. Date of teaching : September , 6th , 2011
Period 6 UNIT 1: GREETINGS Lesson 5: C3, C4, C6

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Introduce others. - Say how old one is. - Practice the way of greeting when they meet other people. - Learn the encouraged spirit in leaning. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (a): old (n): year old (Pro): this 2. Grammar: Structure This is..? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, bingo, question and answer, pair, group work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (3mins) : Ask Ss to count from zero to twenty Warm up (4 minutes) - Read loudly. * Bingo - Ask Ss to choose 9 numbers from Zero to twenty then put them into squares in across and down. - Play as teachers guide. - Read 12 numbers that teacher thinks. (If Ss have 3 numbers in a line, is winner and say BINGO). New Lesson ( 1minute) - Listen Ts introduction. - Introduce the new lesson.

Presentation (9 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures: + Old (a): (Translation) + Year old(n): ( Explanation) + This is + name. (Example) + How old are you? I am (Im) + numbers. (Revise) - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and repeat. Practice (13 minutes) * Role- play: (C3 p18 - Ask Ss to read the dialogues in groups of three. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some groups to read in front of the class. - Correct. * Questions and answers: (C4,P19) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the question How old are you? - Call Some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct. Production (11minutes) * Dialogue- build: - Ask Ss to make the dialogue in groups of three. + Greet + Introduce others. + ask and answer the age. Eg: A: Hello, __________. This is _____________ B: Hi ____________. How old are you? C: Im _____________years old. - Ask Ss to go to the board and show the dialogues they have made. - Correct. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + How old are you? Im years old. + This is.. Homework ( 1minute) - Do exercises C2,3,4 page 8,9,10 in workbook. - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare unit 2: A1,A2,A4

- Guess the meaning of the new words and structures - Repeat, read in chorus and then in individuals. - Repeat in chorus.

- Work in groups of three - Read loudly. - Work in pairs. - Ask And answer loudly.

- Play as teachers guide.

- Show their work. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: ......................................................................................................................

WEEK: 3 Date of preparation: September , 4th , 2011. Date of teaching : September , 7th , 2011
Period 7 UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 1: A1, A2, A4

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Use simple commands in class. - know and do as teachers command. - Learn the encouraged spirit in leaning. B/ Language content:

(v): come in, open, close, stand up, sit down. (n): book 2. Grammar: - Commands. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, Simon says, matching D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (3mins) : Ask Ss some questions related to unit 1 Warm up (3 minutes) * Chatting: - Answer. - Ask Ss some questions. 1. Good morning. 2. How are you? 3. How are you? New Lesson ( 1 minute) - Listen Ts introduction. - Introduce the new lesson Presentation ( 8 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at A1 and guess the meaning in each picture. - Look at and guess. Introduce commands. - Guess the meaning of the + Come in, sit down, open your book, close your book, stand up, commands. - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Repeat, read individuals. - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Repeat, read individuals Practice ( 9 minutes) * Matching: (A2/ page 21) - Guide Ss with example a) - Work in groups of three - Ask Ss to match the commands to pictures. - Call on Ss to read the answers. - Read loudly. - Ask Ss to write answers into notebooks. - Correct. - Work in pairs. * Answer key: - Ask And answer loudly. b. sit down c. come in d. close your book e. stand up Production ( 16 minutes) * Simon says: - Say Simon says and a command. - Do as teachers request. - Say a command. - Do nothing. - Comment and give marks. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. - Listen and remember. + Commands used in class + Lesson from the period. Homework ( 1minute) - Do exercises A page 11, 12 in workbook. - Learn commands by heart. - Prepare B1, B2, B3 F/ Self- Evaluation:

1. Vocabulary:

Date of preparation: September 7th , 2011. Date of teaching : September 9th , 2011
Period 8 UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 2: B1,B3

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask and answer about names, where they live. - Know how to spell the alphabets. - Revise telling the age. - Take care of friends. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (adv): What, Where (n): street, house, city, years old (v): live (Pre): on 2. Grammar: Structure: - What is your name?- My name is. - Where do you live?- I live 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, Role- play, slap the board. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (3mins) : Ask Ss to do as teachers commands Warm up (4 minutes) * Slap the board: - Play as teachers guide. - Guide Ss to play with phrases: come in, stand up, sit down, open your book, and close your book. New Lesson ( 1minute) - Listen Ts introduction. - Introduce the new lesson by letting Ss look at the picture. - Guess the meaning of the new Presentation (minutes) words. - Introduce new words, structures: + What (adv): (Translation) + Where (adv): (Translation) + Live(v): ( Explanation) + Street (n): ( example) + On / in (pre): (translation) - Repeat, read individuals. + Whats your name? My name is + name - Repeat in chorus. + Where do you live? I live on/ in - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and repeat. Practice ( 10 minutes) - Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs. - Work in pairs - Note the pronunciation, the linking sound. Eg: I live -on Tran - Take notes. Phu street. - Call some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Read loudly. - Correct the pronunciation.

Production (14minutes) * Role- play: - Ask Ss to ask and answer about themselves. + Name; + Age; + Place of living - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to show their work. - Correct. Activity (9 minutes) - Introduce the letters from A to Z. - Mark the 4 letters that do not exist in the Vietnamese alphabet f, j, w, z and the differences of the two English letters {e, i} in pronouncing. - Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat. - Teach Ss the Alphabet song. - Call on some Ss to read the Alphabets. Consolidation ( 2 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + The questions: telling about Age, name, and place of living. + Period of the lesson. Homework ( 1minute) - Do exercises 2, 4, 6 page 12, 13 in workbook. - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare B4, B5, B6

- Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen. - Take Notes. - Repeat. - Learn to sing. - Read loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: September 11th , 2011. Date of teaching : September 13th , 2011
Period 9 UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 3: B4, B5, B6

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Spell their names. - Revise the ways of asking name, age, place of living. - Know some information in communicating. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (v): Spell (Pro): it 2. Grammar: How- question word: How do you spell your name/ it? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach; Write it up, pair- work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (5mins) : - Call on Ss to go to the board and answer the questions. -Answer if necessary. - What is your name? - How are you? Where do you go? - How old are you? - Listen

Warm up ( 2 minutes) - Lead from check-up. New Lesson ( 1 minute) - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 9 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures: + Spell (v): ( translation) + it (pro): (synonym) + How do you spell your name/ it? - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Play the tape in B4 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - High light linking sound spell- it, Whats- your. - Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Correct. Practice ( 10 minutes) - Ask Ss to make the small dialogue as B4 in pairs. - Call some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Correct the pronunciation. Production ( 12 minutes) * Write it- up: (B5/ page 25) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions a-d. - Ask Ss to ask and answer before class. - Ask Ss to write their answers into notebooks. - Call on some Ss to write answers on the board. - Correct. Consolidation ( 4 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + Remember part (B6) + Period of the lesson. 4. Homework ( 1minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare C1 - Guess the meaning of the new words. - Repeat, read in individuals. - Repeat in chorus. - Pay attention. - Work in pairs. - Read the dialogue aloud

- Work in pairs - Practice asking and answering before class. - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly. - Write answers down. - Write answers on the board. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

WEEK : 4 Date of preparation: September 11th , 2011. Date of teaching : September 14th , 2011
Period 10 UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 4: C1

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Introduce places, people, and objects. - Ask and answer about people and objects. - Love objects in the class. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Class, school, student, teacher, classroom, and desk 2. Grammar: This is / that is

Is this/ Is that? Yes/ no 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, word cue drill, pair- work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (5mins) : - Ask some questions. Warm up ( 4 minutes) - Sing the song. - Ask Ss to sing the alphabets song. - stand up and spell names. - Write three names on the board and ask Ss to spell them. - Comment and give marks. New Lesson ( 1 minute) - Listen - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 10 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures: - Guess the meaning of the new words. + Student (n): ( example) + Teacher (n): (example) + School (n): ( example) + Class (n): ( example) + Classroom (n):( Explanation) + Desk (n): (Realia) + This is / that is a pen + Is this/ Is that your class?- Yes, this is my class. + Is this/ Is that your school?- No, it isnt. - Repeat, read individuals. - Guide Ss to read the new words. Practice ( 11 minutes) - Play the tape in C1 three first pictures and ask Ss to listen - Repeat in chorus. and repeat. - Highlight the differences between This and that. - Pay attention. - Call on Ss to read content of three first pictures. - Correct. - Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in the rest pictures in - Work in pairs. pairs. - Read the dialogue aloud - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Practice asking and answering before - Call some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. class. - Correct the pronunciation. Production ( 10 minutes) * Word cue drill: - Ask Ss to make question and answer them based on word - Work in pairs. cues. Eg: Desk/ no S1: Is that your desk? S2: No, it isnt. 1. Class/ yes. 2. That/ classroom/ yes. 3. This/ teacher/ no. - Ask and answer loudly. - Ask Ss to ask and answer before class. - Write answers down. - Ask Ss to write their answers into notebooks. - Write answers on the board. - Call on some Ss to write answers on the board. - Correct.

Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + Is this/ Is that..? + Period of the lesson. Homework ( 1minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare C2, C3, C4 - Do exercise C2 on page 15 in workbook

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: September 19th , 2011. Date of teaching : September 20th , 2011
Period 11 UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 5: C2, C3, C4

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Identify the objects. - Ask and answer about the things. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): door, window, board, clock, waste basket, school bag, pencil, pen, ruler, eraser 2. Grammar: - What is this/ that?- Its a/an - Articles: A/ an 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair- work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins)

Teachers activities * Check up: (5mins) : - Point some objects and people and ask Is that/ this?

Students activities - Play as teachers guide.

Warm up ( 5 minutes) * Hang- man: - Listen Ts introduction. - Guide Ss to play with word Classroom - Comment and give marks. - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 9 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures - Guess the meaning of the new words. + Door , window, board, clock, waste basket, school bag, pen, pencil, ruler, eraser (n): ( pictures) + Articles: A/ An + What is this?/ what is that? Its a/ an. - Repeat, read individuals. - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Listen and repeat.

- Play the tape in C2 and ask Ss to repeat. - Call on some Ss to read the words aloud. - Correct. Practice ( 11 minutes) - Play the tape in C1 three first pictures and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Highlight the differences between This and that. - Call on Ss to read content of three first pictures. - Correct. - Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in the rest pictures in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Call some pairs to read the dialogue loudly.

- Read C2 loudly.

- Repeat in chorus. - Pay attention. - Work in pairs. - Read the dialogue aloud - Practice asking and answering before class.

- Correct the pronunciation. Production ( 11 minutes) * Picture drill: - Ask Ss to look at pictures in C2, point, ask and answer the - Work in pairs. questions What is this? What is that? - Ask and answer loudly. - Ask Ss to ask and answer before class. - Correct. Consolidation ( 4 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. - Listen and remember. + C4) Remember + Period of the lesson. Homework ( 1minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare unit 3 ( A1, A2) - Do exercise C1, C3 on page 14, 16 in workbook . F/ Self- Evaluation: 15 MINUTE TEST Nghe v in vo ch trng mt t cn thiu. Hoa: Hi, my ___________(1) is Hoa. What is your name? Nam: Im Nam. Hoa: Nam? How do you ___________(2) it? Nam: Its N-A-M. Hoa: How old are you? Nam: Im ____________(3) years old. How about you? Hoa: Im ______________(4) years old. Where do you live? Nam: I live on Tran Hung Dao Street. And you? Hoa: I live on ______________(5) street. Answer key: Mi t in ng t 2 im Hoa: Hi, my name is Huong. What is your name? Nam: Im Nam. Hoa: Nam? How do you spell it? Nam: its N-A-M.

Hoa: How old are you? Nam: I am twelve years old. How about you? Hoa: Im 13 years old. Where do you live? Nam: I live on Tran Hung Dao Street. And you? Hoa: I live on Le Loi street.

Date of preparation: September 19th , 2011. Date of teaching : September 21st , 2011
Period 12 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 1: A1, A2

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Say what things are. - Ask answer about the things. - Identify the objects in the house using this/ that/ these/ those - Love objects in the family. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: ( n): house, living room, telephone, lamp, armchair, table, Bookshelf, couch, chair, television, stereo, stool, home. (Pro): these, those, they 2. Grammar: - What is this/ that?- Its a/an(Review) - What are these/ those?- Theyre.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair- work, point- ask answer, repetition drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2 New lesson:( 44 mins)

Teachers activities * Check up: ( 3 mins) : - Point objects and ask What is this/ that? Warm up (5 minutes) * Point- ask- answer: - Divide class into 3 groups and guide them play with What is this/ that? - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 9 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures + House, living room, telephone, lamp, armchair, table, bookshelf, couch, chair, television, stereo, stool, home (n): ( pictures) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Note sound / t/ and // in chair and bookshelf. - Introduce the structures: + What are these/ those? They are (theyre).. - Compare the use of this, that/ these, those.

Students activities - Play as Ts guide. - Listen Ts introduction.

- Guess the meaning of the new words. - Repeat, read individuals. - Listen and copy down.

- Listen and repeat. - Read A1 loudly.

- Play the tape in A1 and ask Ss to repeat. - Call on some Ss to read the words aloud. - Correct. Practice ( 14 minutes) * Repetition drill: - Point to the picture, read and introduce the structures. - Ask Ss to repeat. Eg: T: A couch Ss: A couch T: This is a couch Ss: This is a couch. * Picture drill: ( A2 / p32) - Ask Ss to look at the picture in A2 then ask and answer the questions. - Go round and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering loudly. - Correct. Production ( 10 minutes) * Realia drill: - Divide Ss into 2 teams, one team point the real things and ask, the other answers. Eg: Group1: (point a table): What is this? Group 2: its a table. - Write the score and comment. Consolidation ( 2 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + Structures: What is this/ that?- Its a/an. What are these/ those? Theyre.. + Period of the lesson. Homework ( 1minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare unit 3 ( A3, A4, A6)

- Repeat in chorus.

- Work in pairs. - Practice asking and answering before class.

- Work in groups. - Ask and answer loudly.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

WEEK : 5 Date of preparation: September 20th , 2011. Date of teaching : September 23 , 2011
UNIT 3: AT HOME Period 13: Lesson 2: A. MY HOUSE (A3, A4, A6) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Introduce other jobs. - Ask and answer about the age and the name. - Ask and answer about quantity. - Identify someone. - Introduce about their family. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Mother, father, brother, sister, people, and family (Pro): He, she (Adj): His, her (Adv): Who, too 2. Grammar: Structures: - Who is this/ that? - How many people are there?

- She/ He is. - What is his/ her name? - How old is she/ he? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, picture drill, pair- work, Questions and answers D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (3 mins) : - Point some objects and ask what is this/ that?- What are these/ those? - Listen and give lesson Warm up ( 4 minutes) - Listen - Tell short story - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 12 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures - Guess the meaning of the new words. + He/ She (pro): (Example) + Father, mother/ father/ brother/ sister (n): ( Explanation) + People (n): (Translation) + Who, too (adv); ( Translation) - Repeat, read individuals. - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Listen and copy down. - Introduce the structures: + She/ he is a/an. + How old is she/ he?- she/ he is a/an. + What is her/ his name?- her/ his name is.. + How many people are there.? There is/ are. +Who is this/ that? That/ this is - Listen and repeat. + Play the tape in A3 and ask Ss to repeat. - Read A1 loudly. - Call on some Ss to read A3 aloud. - Correct. Practice ( 12 minutes) * Picture drill: ( A4/ P33) - Guide Ss to do the exercise. - Pay attention. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A4 and pictures in A3 then - Look at the pictures and work in pairs. ask and answer the questions in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly. - Call on some Ss to ask and answer aloud. - Correct. Production ( 8 minutes) * Questions and answers: - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions: 1. What is your name? 2. How old are you? 3. How many people are there in your family? - Call on some pair to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation ( 4 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + Remember part. (A6) + Period of the lesson. Homework ( 1minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare unit 3 ( A3, A4, A6) - Work in pairs

- Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: September 25 , 2011. Date of teaching : September 27 , 2011


UNIT 3: AT HOME Period 14 Lesson 3: B. NUMBERS. (B1, B2) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Read and write the numbers from 1 to 100. - know how to use singular and plural nouns. - Know how to pronounce sounds /s/, /z/, /iz/ with plural nouns. - Develop looking skill. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): bench - Cardinal numbers: from1 to 100. 2. Grammar: Structures: - How many people are there? - Plural nouns. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, picture drill, pair- work, Chatting, snakes and ladders D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 38 mins) Teachers activities Students activities * Check up: (5 mins) : - Call Ss to read and write numbers from 0 to 20 Warm up ( 4 minutes) - Answer. * Chatting: - Ask Ss some questions. 1. What is your name? 2. How old are you? 3. Whats your fathers name? 4. How old is your father? - Listen Ts introduction. 5. How many people are there in your family? - Listen and comment - Introduce the new lesson - Guess the meaning of the new .Presentation ( 10 minutes) words. - Introduce new words, structures + Bench (n): ( picture - Repeat, read individuals. + How many people are there.? There is/ are. -Take note - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Introduce the cardinal numbers from 1 to 100. + Ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, one hundred. - Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat. - Introduce the plural nouns. And read sounding /s/, /iz/, /z/ Practice ( 12 minutes) - Call on Ss to count in chorus then individuals. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and take note. - Read in chorus then individuals.

- Correct. - Look at the pictures and count * Picture drill: ( B2/ P36) - Read the answers loudly. - Ask Ss to look at the picture in B2 and count the things in the picture. - Call on some Ss to read the answers loudly. - Correct. Production ( 10 minutes) * Snakes and ladders: - Guide Ss to play the game. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + Plural nouns. + Cardinal numbers. From 1 to 100 + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare unit 3 ( A3, A4, A6)

- Play as teachers guide. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: September 26 , 2011. Date of teaching : September 28 , 2011


Period 15 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 4: B. NUMBERS. (B3, B4, B5, B6)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about the quantity of things. - Count quantity of items in the living room. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: ( n): bookcase 2. Grammar: Structures: - How many people are there? - Plural nouns (review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, picture drill, pair- work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Call Ss to read and write numbers from 0 to 100 Warm up ( 4 minutes) - Answer. * Chatting: - Ask Ss some question. How many people are there in your family? - Listen Ts introduction. - Listen and comment. - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 7 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures - Guess the meaning of the new words. + Bookcase (n): ( synonym)

+ How many people are there.? There is/ are. - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Play the tape B3 and ask Ss to repeat. Practice ( 13 minutes) * Picture drill: ( B4/ P37) - Ask Ss to look at the picture in B2, ask and answer about quantity of items in the picture. + How many ...are there? There are/ is - Call on some pairs to ask and answer before class. - Correct. Production ( 12 minutes) * Picture drill: ( B5 P37) - Ask Ss to count the quantity of items in the picture in B5. - Call on Ss to give answers. - Ask Ss to ask and answer about the quantity of items of picture. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud. - Correct. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + Plural nouns. + Structure: How many..are there? + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare unit 3 ( C1,C2,C4) - Do exercises in B in workbook.

- Repeat, read individuals. - Listen and repeat.

- Look at the pictures, ask and answer. - Ask and answer aloud.

- Count the items. - Give the answers. - Ask and answer. - Show their work.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: September 28th , 2011. Date of teaching : September 30 , 2011


Period 16 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 5: C. FAMILIES. (C1, C2, C4)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about the family. - Ask and answer about members in the family about name, age, occupation. - Understand possessive adjectives. - Love members in their family. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): engineer, doctor, nurse, farmer, and worker (Pro): me 2. Grammar: - What do he/ she do? - How old is her/ his mother? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, picture word cue drill, pair- work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:(44mins)

Teacheractivities * Check up: (5 mins) : - Show the pictures and ask the questions How many ...are there/ is there? Warm up ( 4 minutes) * Word finding: - Divide class into 2 groups. - Ask Ss of each group go to the board and write words related to family many as possible. - Correct. - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 9 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures + Engineer, doctor, nurse, farmer, worker(n): ( Example, explanation) + Me (pro): ( example) + What does he/ she do? he/ she is a/an + job - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Play the tape C1 and ask Ss to listen Practice ( 15 minutes) * Picture word cue drill: ( B5 P37) - Help Ss to ask and answer about Songs family. 1. How old is Song? * 2. What does he do? 3. How old is his father/ Mr. Kien? 4. What does he does? - Ask Ss to ask and answer about Song family in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer about Songs family loudly. - Correct. Production ( 8 minutes) - Ask Ss to talk about their family. - Have them write at home. - Introduce use of possessive adjectives. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the target of the lesson. + Possessive adjectives. + Structure: - What does she/ he do? - What do you do? + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) -Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare Grammar practice. - Do exercises in C in workbook.

Students activities - Play in two groups. - Go to the board and write on the board - Listen Ts introduction.

- Guess the meaning of the new words. - Repeat, read individuals. - Listen

- Pay attention.

- Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly.

- Talk about their family. - Take note. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 3rd , 2011. Date of teaching : October , 5th , 2011
Period 18 GRAMMAR PRACTICE

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Review some main knowledge from unit 1 to unit 3. - Prepare for period test. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): yard 2. Grammar: - Tobe - Commands. - Wh- question words. - Numbers. - Pronouns - Greetings 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chain- game, picture cue drill, pair- work, gap-fill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities *Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask Ss to tell some things about - go to the board and tell. tobe, commands, Wh- questions, numbers, Pronouns, Warm up ( 4 minutes) * Chain- game: - Divide class into 2 groups. - Ask Ss to play with words related to the school (board, pen, pencil) - Correct. - Introduce the new lesson. Activity1 ( 12 Minutes) * Gap- fill ( 1/ 2/ 4/ 7-p 40, 42) - Elicit Tobe in formation and use of them and the word Yard - Ask Ss to find the words to fill in the gaps. - Have them share with their friends. - Call on Ss to read answers aloud. - Correct * Answer key: 1. is, am, are, is, are 2. am, is, is, are, are 4. in, down, your, your, up 7. a)five, eight, ten, twenty, thirty, fifty, seventy, ninety, one hundred. b) 7, 9, 11, 15, 25, 60, 75, 80 Activity2 ( 10 Minutes) * Gap- fill ( 3/6/8/9- 40- 42) - Ask Ss to work in pairs to find the words and fill in the gaps. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct * Answer key: 3.a. are/ am b. is/ is c. is/ isnt d. are/ arent 6. a. What/ is b. where/ live c. who/ is d. what/ is 8. hello/ hi, how, fine, you, thanks 9. this, is, yes that, is, isnt Activity3 ( 10Minutes) * Picture drill ( 5, 10/ P41, 43) - Ask Ss to look at the picture in 5/41 and answer the

- Play in two groups. - Play as teachers guide. - Listen Ts introduction.

- Pay attention. - Fill in the gaps. - Work in p[airs. - Read answers aloud.

- Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly.

- Look at the picture and answer the

questions. - Call on some pairs to ask answer aloud. - Correct - Ask Ss to work in groups to play with quiz in 10/p43 - Call on Ss to give answers - Correct * Answer key: a. there is one. b. there are six. C. there are two d. there is one Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare period test

questions. - Ask and answer loudly. - Play in groups. - Show the answers.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Period 18; Week 6 Date of preparation: October 3rd, 2009 ONE PERIOD TEST (The first time) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Use old knowledge to do the test - Control the better way of learning in next lessons. After the lesson, teacher can change the method to help Ss learn better. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review) 2. Grammar: (Review)

3. Language skills: reading, writing, language focus C/ Techniques: observation D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers. E/ Content of the test I/ Khoanh trn vo mt p n ng nht. (2 im)

1. His name is Hung. He ______________ a teacher. A. are B. is C. do D. does 2. _______________is that? That is my teacher, Long. A. who B. what C. where D. how 3. What are they? - Theyre_______________. A. bench B. stool C. armchairs D. eraser 4. ___________are you? Im eleven. A. How B. How old C. How many D. Where 5. Five + ten = ____________. A. fourteen B. sixteen C. eleven D. fifteen 6. This is ___________eraser. A. a B. an C. two D. three 7. This is my book. ____________are your books. A. This B. That C. These D. Those 8. This is my friend. _________name is Nam. A. He B. His C. She D. I II/ Khoanh trn vo mt p n sai. ( 1 im) 1. There is four rooms in his house. A B C D 2. How are you spell your name? A B C D III/ Ghp cu hi ct A tng ng vi cu tr li ct B. (2 im) Ct A 1. How are you? 2. Is this your desk? 3. How many students are there in the class? 4. What do you do? IV/ in mt t thch hp vo mi ch trng. (2 im) 1. My sister and brother ______________students. 2. I _________________ twelve years old. 3. __________________ is that? That is a pen. 4. Eighty : two = __________________ V/ c on vn v tr li cu hi. (2 im) His name is Huy. This is his family. They are in their living room. There are four people in his family: his father, his mother, his sister and him. This is his father. He is forty. He is a teacher. This is his mother. She is thirty- nine. She is a farmer. His sister is fifteen. She is a student. 1. How many people are there in his family?........... 2. What does his mother do? ................... 3. How old is his mother? ...... 4. Where are they? . VI/ Tr li cu hi v bn thn em (1 im) 1. What is your name? 2. Where do you live? .... Ct B a) Yes, it is. b) Im a student. c) Fine, thank you. d) There are 36. p n 1..................... 2..................... 3..................... 4.....................

P N V HNG DN CHM
I/ 2 IM 1. B 2.A 3. C II/ 1 IM 1. A 2. B III/ 2 IM 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b IV/ 2 IM 1. are 2. am 3. what V/ 2 IM 1. There are four people in his family. 2. Her mother/ she is a farmer. 3. Her mother/ She is thirty- nine. 4. They are in their living room. VI/ 1. My name is/ my names + students names. 2. I live in Easol. 4. B 5. D 6. B 7. C 8. B

4. forty

MA TRN
F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 5 , 2011. Date of teaching : October 7 , 2011

Period 19 UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL Lesson 1: A. WHERE ARE YOUR SCHOOL? (A1, A2)
A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask and answer about places. - Use the possessive of noun. - Ask and answer about characteristics. - Love their school and like going to school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary : (n): country (a): big, small (Pre): in 2. Grammar: - Where is your school? (it is in the city) - Is your school big / big? (Yes, it is/ no, it isnt) - Phongs school is small. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, Picture realization, questions and answers, role play, pair- work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities

Warm up (3 minutes) * Picture realization: - Ask Ss to look at two pictures on page 44 and compare 2 pictures. - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 10 minutes) - Introduce new words, structures + Big (a): (mine) + Small (a): ( antonym) + In (pre): ( Translation) + Phongs school ( nouns + noun) + Is Phongs school big? Yes, it is/ no, it isnt. + Where is Phong school? It is in the country. - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Play the tape A1 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. Practice ( 18 minutes) - Call on some Ss to read A1 loudly. - Correct. * Questions and answers: - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer before class. - Correct. Answer key: a. Yes, it is. b. No, it isnt. c .It is in the country. d. No, it isnt. Production ( 8 minutes) * Role- play: - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions. 1. Where is your school? 2. Is your school big? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (4 minutes) - Summarize the lesson. + Possessive of noun + Structure: - Where is your school? (its in the city) - Is your school big / big? ( Yes, it is/ no, it isnt) - Phongs school is small. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare A3, A4, A5* A6 - Do exercises A1, A2 on page 35, 36 in workbook

- Compare two pictures. -Listen Ts introduction. - Guess the meaning of the new words.

- Repeat, read individuals. - Listen and repeat. - Read A1 loudly. - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly.

- Work in pairs - Show their work. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 9 , 2011. Date of teaching : October 11 , 2011

Period 20

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

Lesson 2: A. WHERE ARE YOUR SCHOOL? (A3, A4,A6)


A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask and answer about quantity. - Understand and use Or questions - Develop reading skill. - Love their school and know more about their school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (conj): or 2. Grammar: - How many.are there? - Is your school in the country or in the city?- It is in the country. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, questions and answers, Prediction, pair- work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins)

Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask Ss some questions: - Aswer + Where is your school? + Is it small? + Is it in the country? Warm up (3 minutes) - Guide Ss to sing a song. - Sing as teachers guide - Introduce the new lesson. - Listen Ts introduction. Pre- Reading (5 Minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer about the quantity of people in the - Answer family. - Take notes. - Revise the ways of asking about the quantity. * Open- prediction: - Guess and fill the table. - Ask Ss guess and fill in the table. Classrooms Students Thus school Phongs school - Write Ss prediction on the board. While- Reading ( 15 Minutes) - Read A3 - Listen - Call on some Ss to read A3 loudly. - Read A3 loudly. - Ask Ss to read A3 and check their prediction. - Read and check their prediction. - Ask Ss to answer. - Correct. Answer key: Classrooms Students Thus school 20 900 Phongs school 8 400 - Answer the questions. * Questions and answers: ( a to d page 45) - Ask and answer - Ask Ss to answer the questions from a) to d)

- Ask the questions one by one. - Help Ss to understand and give answer key. - Correct. Answer key: a. There are 8 classrooms in Phongs school. b. There are four hundred students in his school. c. There are twenty classrooms in Thus school. d. There are nine hundred students in her school. Post-Reading ( 11 Minutes) - Elicit or question - Pay attention and take note. - Ask Ss to answer the questions in B4 in groups. - Ask and answer the questions in - Go around and help if necessary. groups. - Call on Ss from each group to give answers. - Give answers. Suggested answers: a. My school is in the country b. There are tens classrooms. c. There are seven hundred students. Consolidation (4 minutes) - Summarize the lesson. - Listen and remember. + A6 (the questions and answers + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6 - Do exercises A3, 4, 5 on page 37, 38 in workbook F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 12, 2011. Date of teaching : October 14 , 2011

Period 21

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask their friends about their grades and classes. - Use the ordinal numbers from first to tenth. - Love class and school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): grade, floor, class, ordinal numbers. (v): Have/ Has (Adv): Which 2. Grammar: - Which grade/ class/ floor..? - How many school does your school have?- It has three floors. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, complete the table, gap- fill, pair- work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins)

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL Lesson 3: B. MY CLASS (B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6)

Teachers activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask Ss to answer the questions: - Is your school in the country or in the city? - How many classrooms are there? - How many students are there? Warm up ( 3 minutes) - Comment and give marks. - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 9 minutes) - Introduce the situation a of B1 - Introduce new words, structures + Ordinal numbers :( First 1st, second 2nd, third 3 rd, fourth 4th, fifth 5th, sixth 6th, seventh 7th, eighth 8th, ninth 9th, tenth 10th) + floor (n): ( Explanation) + Grade (n): (Example) + Class (n): (example) + Have/ Has (v): (Translation) + Which grade are you in?- I am in grade 6 + Which class are you in?- I am in class 6A. + How many school does your school have?- It has three floors. - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Ask and answer the questions in pairs. Practice ( 17 minutes) - Play the tape B1 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to read B1 in pairs. - Call on some Ss to read B1 loudly. - Correct. * Complete the table: (B2/ P48) - Ask Ss to read B2 and fill in the table. - Call on some Ss to give answers of the table. - Correct. Answer key: Grade Class Classrooms floor Thu 7 7C 2 nd Phong 6 6A 1 st You (6) (6A) 1st * Write-it up: (B3/p48) - Ask Ss to look at column You and write three sentences. - Elicit Im in grade Im in class. My classroom is on the.floor. - Call on some Ss to write their answers on the board. - Correct Production ( 7 minutes) * Gap- fill: (B5/ P48) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find the words for gaps. - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some Ss to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Answer key: Small- does- has- are- am- is- on

Students activities - Aswer

- Answer - Listen Ts introduction. - Listen - Guess the meaning of the new words.

- Repeat, read individuals. - Ask and answer.

- Listen and repeat. - Read B1 in pairs. - Read B1 loudly. - Read B2, fill the table - Give answers.

- Look at the table and write three sentences. - Write answers on the board.

- Read the dialogue and find the words for gaps. - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly.

Consolidation (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at B6 and listen Ts explanation.. - Give period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare C1,C2,C3 - Do exercises B in workbook and learn B5 by heart.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 16, 2011. Date of teaching : October 18 , 2011

Period 22;

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL Lesson 4: C. GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL C2, C3)

(C1,

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask and answer about everyday activities. - Write about Bas activities. - Know how to get ready for school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): teeth, breakfast, face (v): get up, get dressed, brush, wash, have, go to (a): Every (Conj); then, next 2. Grammar: - What do you do every morning? - What does Ba do every morning? - Form of verbs after singular noun/ pronoun. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, Write-it- up, pair- work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:(44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask Ss to ask and answer B5 loudly. Warm up ( 3 minutes) - Give a riddle - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation ( 8 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at C1 and guess the activities in each picture. - Introduce new words, structures by mining or using pictures. + Get up + Get dressed Students activities - Ask and answer - Guess the key. - Listen Ts introduction. - Listen - Guess the meaning of the new words.

+ Get + Brush my teeth + Wash my face + Have breakfast + Go to school + What do you do every morning? + What does Ba do every morning? - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Elicit the difference between verbs used after I and he Practice ( 17 minutes) - Play the tape C1 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to read C1 in pairs, one is I , one is he - Call on some Ss to read B1 loudly. - Correct. * Role- play: ( C2/p49) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the question in C2. - Elicit then, next, after that - Ask Ss to ask and answer loudly - Correct. Production ( 8 minutes) * Write-it up: (C3/p49) - Ask Ss to write five sentences about Ba begin with Every morning, Ba gets up, - Call on some Ss to write their answers on the board. - Correct Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the verbs used after I and he and every morning activities - Give period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare C4, C5, C6, C7, C8 - Do exercises C1, C2 page 41 in workbook .

- Repeat, read individuals. - Take notes

- Listen and repeat. - Read B1 in pairs. - Read B1 loudly. - Work in pairs. - Take notes. - Give answers.

- Write - Write on the board. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 16 , 2011. Date of teaching : October 19 , 2011

Period 23; UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL Lesson 5: C. GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL (C4, C5, C6, C7, C8)
A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask for and say the time. - Ask for and answer the time of everyday activities. - Know time to get ready for school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (exp): oclock, late for school, half past 2. Grammar: - What time is it?- Its .

- What time do you ? I at.. - What time does he/ she ..? She/ Heat. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Picture description, pre- teach, answer given, questions and answers D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask Ss to answer the question: - three Ss answer - What do you do every morning? - Listen Ts introduction. - What does (students name) do every morning? Warm up ( 3 minutes) - Comment and give marks. - Introduce the new lesson ( the time and time of activities) Presentation ( 10 minutes) - Introduce the situation of C4. - Introduce new words, structures + time (n): ( Explanation) + Oclock (exp) : ( Translation) + Late for school (exp): ( Explanation) - Help Ss read the new words - Introduce the ways of asking for and answering the time. + What time is it? _ Gi ung: Its + s gi+ oclock. _ Gi hn: Its + s gi+ so pht. _ Gi ri: Its half past + s gi - Give more examples to make sure Ss to understand. -Play the tape part C4, ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some Ss pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Correct Practice ( 16 minutes) - Play the tape C5 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Call some Ss to read time in C5. - Give time and ask Ss to ask and answer about the time in pairs - Call on some Ss to ask and answer aloud. - Correct. * Answers given ( C6 /p51) - Ask Ss to read sentences silently - Highlight the ordering of verbs in sentence and the use of at . - Introduce the structures + What time does he (get up)? He (gets up) at ... + What time do you (get up)? I (get up) at. - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions based on the answers given. - Ask Ss to ask and answer loudly - Correct. Production (5 minutes) * Questions and answers: (C7/p51) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in C7

- Listen - Guess the meaning of the new words - Repeat, read individuals. - Take notes

- Pay attention. - listen and repeat. - read in pairs. - Read the dialogue impairs loudly.

- Listen and repeat. - Read B1 in pairs. - Read B1 loudly.

- Read sentences silently - Take notes.

- Work in pairs. - Give answers.

- Ask and answer in pairs.

- Call on some Ss to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Consolidation (4 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at C8 and listen Teachers brief explanation. - Give period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare C4, C5, C6, C7, C8 - Do the rest of exercises in C part in workbook

- Show their work - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 19 , 2011. Date of teaching : October 21 , 2011

Period 24;

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can:

CORECTION THE TEST + Test 15

- Learn from the errors in the tests. - Control better method of learning for next lessons. Teacher can evaluate students knowledge and change suitable method in next teaching lessons. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review): 2. Grammar: ( Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chain- game, picture cue drill, pair- work, gap-fill D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) 3. Key I. Chn t thch hp in vo ch trng : 1/His 2/ How old 3/ twenty-nine 4.This 5/ an 6/ He 7/ Who 8/What do you do? II. Ni ct A thch hp vi ct B: 1/c 2/a 3/d 4/b III.Tm li sai : 1/A 2/ A 3/ C 4/ D IV. Vit dng ng ca ng t : 1. am 2. is 3. is 4. are V., c on vn v tr li cu hi 1. There are 5 people in her family. 2. He is forty. 3. He is a doctor. 4. She is 35. 5. She is a nurse. 6. They are students. 4. Results Lp Bi HS lm/ s HS 6A3 38 >= 8 4 >= 5 9 < 5 13 < 3.5 12

6A4 All

39 77

20 24

16 25

3 16

0 12

4. Homework (1 minute) Prepare unit 5: A1, A2, A3, A4

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..
TEST 15 Mn : Ting Anh 6 I. GIVE THE RIGHT TENSE OF THE VERBS. (7MS) 1. Ba ( get ) _____gets_____________ up at six. 2. He ( wash ) ____washes____________ his face at 6:30. 3. I ( go ) ________go_____________ to school at 6:40. 4. She ( go ) ______goes____________ to school at 6:45. 5. Thu and I ( be ) _______are___________ new students. II. WRITE THE TIME. ( 3MS ) 1. 1:00 Its ___one oclock__________________ 2. 2:00 Its ____two oclock__________________. 3. 11:30 Its____eleven thirty_________________. 4. 5:55 Its _____five fifty-five_______________ 5. 10:10 Its _____ten-ten____________________. KEY I. GIVE THE RIGHT TENSE OF THE VERBS. (5MS) 1. Ba _____gets_____________ up at six. 2. He ____washes____________ his face at 6:30. 3. I ________go_____________ to school at 6:40. 4. She ______goes____________ to school at 6:45. 5. Thu and I _______are___________ new students. II. WRITE THE TIME. ( 5MS ) 6. 1:00 Its ___one oclock__________________

7. 2:00 Its ____two oclock__________________. 8. 11:30 Its____eleven thirty_________________. 9. 5:55 Its _____five fifty-five_______________ 10. 10:10 Its _____ten-ten____________________.

Date of preparation: October 23, 2011. Date of teaching : October 25 , 2011

Period 25

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO Lesson 1: A. MY DAY (A1, A2, A3, A4)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about daily routines. - Talk about activities after school. - Compare the formation of some verbs with singular subjects. - Choose the suitable activities after school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): day, game, homework, housework, music (v): play, watch, listen to, and read (Exp): after school, 2. Grammar: - What do you do every ..? - What does Ba do every ..? - What do you do every after school - What does Ba do every after school? - Form of verbs after singular noun/ pronoun. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, role- play, pair- work, interview D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Show a clock and ask Ss some questions. - Answer + What time is it? + What time do you get up? + What time do you have breakfast? + What time do you go to school? Warm up ( 3 minutes) - Guide Ss to play the game: Hang- Man - Play as teachers guide - Introduce the new lesson. - Listen. Presentation 1 ( 4 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures of A1 on page 52 and talk about - Listen Ngas activities. - Introduce new words and structures. - Guess the meaning of the new words. + Thing (n): ( translation) + Day (n): (Explanation) + Play (v): (Example)

+ game (n): (example) + Homework( n): ( Explanation) + What do you do every .? + What does Nga do every ..? - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Elicit the difference between verbs used after I and she and pronunciation: does and goes Practice 1 ( 7 minutes) - Play the tape A1 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to read A1 in pairs, one is I , one is she - Call on some Ss to read A1 loudly. - Correct. * Questions and answers (A2/ Page 53) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in A2 in pairs. - Go around and help if necessary. - Ask Ss to ask and answer loudly - Correct. Answers key: a. Every day, Nga gets up at six. b. Every morning, She goes to school. c. Every afternoon, she plays games. d. Every evening, she does her homework. Production 1 ( 6 minutes) * Role- play: - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions. 1. What do you do every day? 2. What do you do every morning? 3. What do you do every afternoon? 4. What do you do every evening? - Call on some Ss to write their answers on the board. - Correct Presentation 2 ( 6 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures of A3 on page 53 and talk about activities. - Introduce new words and structures. + Watch (v): ( translation) + listen to (v): (Picture) + Read (v): (Example) + Housework (n): (Picture) + Homework( n): ( Explanation) + After school (exp): ( Translation) + What do you do every after school? + What does Nga do every after school? - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Elicit the difference between verbs used after I and she Practice 2 ( 6 minutes) - Play the tape A3 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to read A3 in pairs, one is I , one is she - Call on some Ss to read A1 loudly. - Correct. * Questions and answers (A4/ Page 54) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in A4 in pairs. - Go around and help if necessary. - Ask Ss to ask and answer loudly

- Repeat, read individuals. - Take notes - Listen and repeat. - Read A1 in pairs. - Read A1 loudly. - Work in pairs. - Give answers.

- Work in pairs.

- Ask and answer loudly. - Listen - Guess the meaning of the new words.

- Repeat, read individuals. - Take notes - Listen and repeat. - Read A3 in pairs. - Read A3 loudly. - Work in pairs. - Give answers.

- Correct. Answers key: a. After school, Lan does the housework. b. After school, Ba watches television. c. After school, Thu reads. d. After school, Nam listens to music. Production 2 ( 4 minutes) * Interview: - Ask Ss to ask and answer the question. What do you do after school? - Call on some Ss to answer loudly - Correct Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises1, 2, 3 in workbook - Prepare A5, A6, A7 F/ Self- Evaluation:

- Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

Date of preparation: October 24 , 2011. Date of teaching : October 26 , 2011

Period 26;

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO Lesson 2: A. MY DAY (A5, A6, A7)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask and answer about sport activities. - Listen and answer yes/ no questions. - Choose the suitable activities after school to practice for health. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): volleyball, soccer, girl, sport, 2. Grammar: - Yes/ no questions: Do/ Does 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, pair- work, questions and answers, transformation drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette player, tape, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 3. New lesson:( 44 mins)

Teachers activities

Students activities

Check up: (4 mins) : - Ask Ss some questions: + What do you do after school? + What does..do after school? Warm up ( 2 minutes) - Ask Ss to talk about activities after school. - Introduce the new lesson by asking, Do you play volleyball? in Vietnamese. Presentation ( 8 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures of A5 and introduce the activities in it. - Introduce new words and structures. + Sport (n): ( Example) + soccer (n) football (Explanation) + Play (v): (Example) + Volleyball (n): (Picture) + Girl( n): ( Explanation) + Do girls play soccer? Yes, they do/ no, they dont. + Does Nga play soccer? Yes, she does/ no, she doesnt. + Do you play soccer? Yes, I do/ no, I dont. - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. Practice ( 12 minutes) - Play the tape A5 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to read A5 in pairs, - Call on some Ss to read A5 loudly. - Correct. * Questions and answers (A6/ Page 55) - Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in A6 in pairs. - Go around and help if necessary. - Ask Ss to ask and answer loudly - Correct. Production ( 12 minutes) * Transformation drill: - Ask Ss to change the sentences into yes/ no questions then answer them. 1. Ba plays soccer/ yes. 2. Thu and Ba play volleyball/ no. 3. You play soccer/ yes. Eg: S1: Does Ba play soccer? S2: Yes, he does. - Ask Ss to ask and answer in pairs. - Call on some Ss to show their work loudly. - Correct Consolidation (5 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at A7 and listen to the questions and formation of verbs in different personals. +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do the rest of exercises in workbook - Prepare B1, B2

- Talk - Listen Ts introduction.

- Listen - Guess the meaning of the new words.

- Repeat, read individuals. - Listen and repeat. - Read A5 in pairs. - Read A5 loudly. - Listen and repeat - Work in pairs. - Give answers.

- Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 26 , 2011. Date of teaching : October 28 , 2011

Period 27

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about daily routines. - Talk about time of daily activities. - Read details about Bas activities. - Have a schedule in a day. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): bed, classes (v): take, eat, study, start, finish (Exp): Take a shower, in the afternoon, in the evening, go home, Go to bed 2. Grammar: - Telling the time: a quarter to ./ a quarter past.. - From..to. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pre- teach, pair- work, Prediction. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Show a clock and ask Ss some questions. - Answer + What time is it? + What time do you get up? + Do you play soccer? + Do you read? - Comment and give marks. Warm up ( 3 minutes) - Look and talk - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in B1 and talk activities in. - Listen Ts introduction. - Introduce the new lesson ( Talk about daily routines and Bas routines) Pre- Reading ( 8 Minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures of B1 and guess the activities in - Look at the pictures and guess. each one. - Introduce new words and structures. - Guess the meaning of the new words. + Take a shower (exp): ( picture) + Eat breakfast (exp): ( synonym) + Go home (exp); (Translation) + Classes (n): (example) + Go to bed (exp): ( Explanation) + Have lunch (exp) :( explanation) + a quarter to / a quarter past..(exp): ( Translation) - Repeat, read individuals. + From.to

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO Lesson 3: B. MY ROUTINE (B1, B2)

+ In the morning/ in the afternoon/ in the evening (exp): (Explanation) - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. * Prediction: Hng ngy Ba thng lm g lc my gi? - Ask Ss to guess and answer the questions. - Write Ss prediction on the board. While- Reading ( 18 Minutes) - Read B1 and ask Ss to listen - Elicit Start, Finish - Ask Ss to read B1 and correct their prediction. * Gap- fill/ B2/ Page 57) - Ask Ss to look at the table in B2 on page 57. - Guide Ss to understand the content of the B2. - Ask Ss to read B1 and complete the table in B2 - Go around and help if necessary. - Ask Ss to read the answers loudly. - Correct. Answers key: Get up 6.00 Go to school 6.45 Classes start 7.00 Classes finish 11.15 Have lunch 11.30 Go home 5.00 Go to bed 10.00 Production ( 6 minutes) - Ask Ss to translate B1 into Vietnamese. - Call on some Ss to translate loudly. - Correct Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare B3, B4 F/ Self- Evaluation:

- Guess and answer.

- Listen and take note.

- Look at B2. - Pay attention. - Give answers.

- work individuals - Answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

Date of preparation: October 30 , 2011. Date of teaching : November 1 , 2011


Period 28 UNIT 5: THINGS I DO Lesson 4: B. MY ROUTINE (B3, B4)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about daily routines. - Talk about time of daily activities. - Understand formation of verbs in different personals. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review) 2. Grammar: - Telling the time: a quarter to ./ a quarter past../ half past - Verbs used in different personals. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: pair- work, brainstorming D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask Ss to read B1 aloud - Read Warm up ( 3 minutes) - Ask Ss to work in groups. - Work in groups. Routines Get up - Ask Ss to write daily activities. - Write daily activities. - Comment. - Listen and remember - Introduce the new lesson ( Talk about daily routines and Bas - Listen Ts introduction. routines) Pre- speaking ( 7 Minutes) - Help Ss read questions in B3 a) aloud. - Repeat, read individuals. - Guide Ss to answer the questions with What time? While-speaking ( 15 Minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in a) in pairs. - Work in pairs - Guide Ss to look at the table in B2 and answer. - Pay attention Get up 6.00 Go to school 6.45 Classes start 7.00 Classes finish 11.15 Have lunch 11.30 Go home 5.00 Go to bed 10.00 - Go around and help if necessary. - Ask and answer loudly. - Call on some pair to ask and answer loudly. Post-speaking ( 10 Minutes) - Ask Ss to answer the questions in B3 b) in pairs. - work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - ask and answer loudly. - Correct Consolidation (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at B4 and listen teachers explanation. - Listen and remember. +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute)

- Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in B1, 2, 3, 4 on page 47- 50 in workbook - Prepare C1 F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: October 30 , 2011. Date of teaching : November 2 , 2011


Period 29; UNIT 5: THINGS I DO Lesson 5: C. CLASSES (C1)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Name some subjects in school. - Use HAVE and DO NOT HAVE to talk about the school timetable. - Talk about time for each subject at school. - Love subjects in school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Timetable, today, Monday, subjects at school. (v): Have, do not have 2. Grammar: - What do we have today? We have.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, role play, picture drill, pair work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, tape, some books E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask Ss to answer the questions: What time do you get up/ go - Answer to school/ have classes/ have lunch/ go home/ go to bed? Warm- up (4 minutes) - Ask Ss to give how many subjects in their school? - Answer - Introduce the new lesson ( Talk about subjects at school and - Listen Ts introduction. time table) Presentation ( 10 minutes) - Introduce new words and structures. - Guess the meaning of the new words. + Timetable (n): ( Realia) + Today (n): ( Translation) + Monday (n); (Explanation) + Math/ physics/ chemistry/ biology/ history/ geography/ literature/ English/ technology/ physical education/ civic education/ music/ fine art/ elective subject (n): ( Realiaexplanation) + What do we have today? We have.. + What time do we have? - We have..at( fromto) - Repeat, read individuals. - We dont have............... - Listen - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - Play the tape in C1

Practice ( 15 minutes) - Ask some Ss to read C1 aloud * Picture drill/ Page 58) - Ask Ss to look at four subjects in C1 on page 58. - Ask Ss to ask and answer in pairs about : + What do we have today?- We have........ + What time do we have.? - Go around and help if necessary. - Ask Ss to ask an answer loudly. - Correct. Production( 6 minutes) * Play role: 1. What do we have today? 2. What time do we have+ subject? - Ask Ss to ask and answer about that day. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Consolidation ( 2 Minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework ( 2 Minutes) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Prepare C2, C3, C4 F/ Self- Evaluation:

- Read C1 loudly - Look at four subjects - Work in pairs.

- Ask and answer aloud

- Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

Date of preparation: November 2 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 4 , 2011


Period 30; UNIT 5: THINGS I DO Lesson 6: C. CLASSES (C2, C3, C4)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Name the days in a week. - Describe school timetables. - Love subjects in school. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): week, day, days of the week. (adv): when ( pre): on 2. Grammar:- when do we have .................? We have.. on ............ 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, role play, pair work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, tape, some books E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities

Check up: (5 mins) : - Ask 2 questions: 1. What do we have today? 2. What time do we have+ subject? - Write as Ts requirement - Listen to Ts introduction. - Listen to and repeat. - Guess the meaning of the new words. - Pay attention and take note. - Repeat, read individuals. - Listen - Read C3 in pairs loudly - Look at timetable - pay attention - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer aloud

Warm- up ( 3 minutes) - Call on some Ss to write some subjects on the board. - Introduce the new lesson ( days of the week, school timetables) Presentation ( 12 minutes) Play the tape (C2) two times. - Introduce the days of the week. + Week, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday) - Introduce the structure. + When do we have+ subject? We have+ subject on + day. - Make sure Ss to understand the new structure. - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures. - play the tape in C3 Practice ( 15 minutes) - Ask some Ss to read C3 in pair aloud * Role-play: - Ask Ss to look at school timetable then ask and answer about it. 1. When do we have + subject? 2. Do you have + subject on + day? - Go round and help if necessary - Ask Ss to ask and answer in pairs - Ask Ss to ask an answer loudly. - Correct. Production( 4 minutes) * Sing a song: There are seven days- there are seven days There are seven days in a week. Sunday Monday, Tuesday Wednesday, Thursday Friday Saturday. - Help Ss sing the song. - Ask Ss to sing - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Consolidation (4 Minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + C5 + Period of the lesson. Homework ( 1 Minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Grammar practice F/ Self- Evaluation:

- Sing as teachers guide.

- Listen and remember.

Date of preparation: November 6 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 6 , 2011

Period 31; GRAMMAR PRACTICE A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Practice using ordinary verbs in present simple tense. - Further practice in asking and answering the time, question words, yes/ no questions, classes. - Have good ways in consolidating. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (v): Help, end (n): store 2. Grammar: - The present simple tense - Time - Adjectives - Question words - Classes 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: questions and answers, gap- fill, picture drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson: (44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (4mins) Questions: - What do we have today? - When do you have English? Warm- up ( 3 minutes) - Ask Ss to say what they learned in previous units. - Introduce the new lesson (Practice using ordinary verbs in present simple tense, Further practice in asking and answering the time, question words, yes/ no questions, classes.) Activity 1 ( 14 Minutes) * Gap- fill: ( 1/7 Present simple tense) (Page 60) - Elicit the formation, use, and clues of the present simple tense. - Ask Ss to use right form of verbs in the brackets then ask and answer in pairs. - Call on 4 pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct. Answer key: 1)a. get- get- get- gets- get- get. b. do....have- have- does.....have- has- do.....have- have c. Do....go- go- do.....go-go- does.....go d. Do....wash- wash- Does.....wash- washes. 7) a. gets b. takes c.brushes d. has e. goes Activity 2 ( 12 Minutes) * Picture drill: ( 2. Time: age 60) - Revise how to ask the time and answer. -Ask Ss to look at the clocks then ask and answer the time. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud. - Correct Answer key: What time is it? a) its seven oclock. b) Its nine fifteen c) Its half past four d) Its twelve oclock e) Its one forty five f) Its ten to nine

- Answer - Listen to

- Pay attention - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly.

- Read C3 in pairs loudly - Look at timetable - pay attention - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer aloud

Activity 3 ( 8 Minutes) * Questions and answers ( 3. Adjectives/ 5. Classes/ 6. present simple tense- Page 61) - Elicit new word: + store, end, help - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Answer key: 3/ 5/ 6: students answers Consolidation (2 Minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 6 ( A1, A2, A3)

- Take notes - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Take notes

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: November 6 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 9 , 2011


Period 32; UNIT 6: PLACES Lesson1: A. OUR HOUSE (A1, A2, A3)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe the surroundings around their house. - understand how to introduce some information about personal information. - Love the surroundings around their house. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (pre): near (n): lake, yard, river, hotel, park, tree, flower, rice paddy ( a): beautiful (adv): here (art): a, the 2. Grammar: - Wh- question words, - Structures: + What is that/ this? + What are these/ those? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: questions and answers, pre- teach, picture drill, chatting D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: - Ss answer - What is your name? - How old are you? - What do you do? - Where do you live?

Warm- up (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to say what there are near their houses. - Introduce the new lesson (know some surroundings around their houses.) Presentation ( 10 minutes) - Introduce the new words + near (pre): (translation) + Lake, yard, river, hotel, park, tree, flower, rice paddy (n): ( picture) + Beautiful (a): (translation) + Here (adv): ( Example) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Introduce the content A1 about Thuys house. - Play the tape then ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Call on some Ss to read the passages loudly. - Ask Ss to read the questions from a) to f) and find the information in the passages to answer. - Have Ss exchange the answers with a friend. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions loudly. Answer key: a. Thuy is trelve years old. b. Shes a student. c. Her brothers name is Minh. d. He is twenty. e. Thuy lives in a house near the lake. f. There is a river, a hotel, a park and a rice paddy near the house. Practice ( 14 minutes) * Picture drill: ( A2/ P 63) - Revise the structures: What is this/ that?- What are these/ those? - Ask Ss to look at the picture in A1 then ask and answer about the surroundings. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud. - Correct Production( 10 minutes) * Write it- up: ( A3. Page 63) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A3 and name the pictures. - Ask Ss to change the pictures into words and write sentences into notebooks. - Call on some Ss to read the passage loudly. - Correct Answer key: Yard....rice paddy......hotel.....lake......river.....park......trees....flowers Consolidation (3 Minutes) - Summarize +There is a......./ There are........ + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises A1, A2 in workbook - Prepare Unit 6 ( A4, A5, A6, A7)

- Answer - Listen to - Guess the meaning of the words.

- Repeat and read. - Listen. - Listen and repeat. - Read A1 loudly. - Find the answers for questions in A1. - Compare the answers. - Ask and answer loudly.

- pay attention - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer aloud

- Look at A3 and name. - Change pictures into words. - Read passage loudly. - Take notes

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: November 9 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 11 , 2011


UNIT 6: PLACES Lesson 2: A. OUR HOUSE (A4, A5, A7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Get further practice how to describe the surroundings around their house. - Develop listening, writing skills. - Love the surroundings around their house. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Village, town 2. Grammar: - Structures: + There is a.....near our house + There are .......near our house 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: questions and answers, pre- teach, picture drill, chatting D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, pictures E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:(44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) - Show the pictures and ask : What is this/ that?___ - Listen and write down. What are these/ those? - Listen to Warm-up (3 minutes) - Read a sentence in English and ask Ss to write down. - Introduce the new lesson (describe surroundings around the houses and develop listening skill) Activity 1 / A4(15 minutes) - Introduce the new words + Village (n): ( Explanation) + Town (n): ( Example) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Ask Ss to read the words in the box in A4 - Ask Ss to listen and write the words they hear. - Play the tape two times. - Call on some Ss to read the answers loudly. - Play the tape again and correct. Answer key: a. hotel b. city c. river Pre- writing (7minutes) - Ask Ss to name pictures in A5. - Ask Ss to read the example in A5. - Elicit the words: + Pepper tree, coffee tree - Guide Ss to write the sentences using: ( There is a/ there are......near our house) - Explain and give more examples to make sure Ss to understand. White- writing (5 minutes) * Write it- up: ( A3. Page 63) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A5 and say the sentences. Period 33

- Guess the meaning of the words. - Repeat and read. - Read words loudly - Listen and write the words they hear. - Read the answers. - Listen and check

- Name the pictures. - Read example in A5. - Copy down. - Pay attention.

- Look at A5 and say

- Go around and help if necessary. Post- writing (5 minutes) - Call on some Ss to read their sentences loudly. - Correct Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize +There is a......./ There are........ + A7 : Ss translate into Vietnamese + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercise A3 in workbook - Prepare Unit 6 ( B) - Read sentences loudly. - Take notes - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: November 12 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 15 , 2011


Period 34 UNIT 6: PLACES Lesson 3: B. IN THE CITY ( B1, B2, B3, B5)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe the surroundings in the town. - Develop listening, reading skills. - Love the surroundings around their house. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): store, restaurant, bookstore, temple, neighborhood, hospital factory, museum, stadium (pre) : next to (v): (work) 2. Grammar: - Structures: + There is/are.............. + Their house is next to a store + Where does he work?- He works....... 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: True/ false prediction, pre- teach, Gap- fill, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, pictures E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Question: - what is there near your house? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the picture in B1 on page 65 and tell the content - Listen and write down. of it. - Introduce the new lesson (describe surroundings in the city and - Listen to develop listening and reading skills)

Pre- reading (8 minutes) - Introduce the new words + Store, restaurant, bookstore, temple, neighborhood(AE), neighborhood (BE), hospital factory, museum, stadium (n): (picture- Explanation) + Next to : (example) + Work : (v): ( work) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Ask Ss to read the words in the box in A4 * True/ False prediction:B1/ a) f) Page 66 - Make sure Ss to understand the meaning of the statements above. - Ask Ss to guess the sentences are true or false. - Write Ss prediction on the board. While- reading (7minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud. - Ask Ss to read B1 and check their prediction. - Call on Ss to give answers. - Correct. * Answer key: a. F b. T c. F d. T e. F f. F Post- reading (7 minutes) * Gap fill; ( B2. Page 66) - Help Ss understand content of a)- e) in B2. - Ask Ss to read B1 and find the words to complete sentences. - Have Ss share the answers with a partner. - Call on some Ss to read answers loudly. - Correct. * Answer key: a. city b. restaurant- bookstore- temple c. hospital d. house- store e. factory Pre- Listening (4 minutes) - Ask Ss to read the words in the box in B3 on page 67. - Highlight the stress of these words. While- Listening (5 minutes) - Play the tape two times.

- Guess the meaning of the words.

- Repeat and read. - Read words loudly - Pay attention. - Guess - Read the prediction loudly. - Listen - Read the passage loudly - Read B1 and correct prediction. - Give answers.

their

- Pay attention. - Read B1 and complete sentences. - Read answers loudly.

the

- Read words loudly. - Pay attention. - Listen and choose the right words. - Give answers - Correct

- Call on Ss to give answers. - Play the tape again and correct with Ss. * Answer key: a. Temple b. factory c. yard d. street Post- Listening (4 minutes) - Play the tape B4 and ask Ss to repeat. - Listen and repeat. - Call on Ss to read B4 loudly. - Read B4 loudly. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize - Listen and remember. +There is a......./ There are........ + B5 : Ss translate into Vietnamese and ask Ss to ask and answer about their father. + Period of the lesson.\ Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercise in B in workbook

- Prepare Unit 6 ( C1, C2) F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: November 14 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 16 , 2011


Period 35; UNIT 6: PLACES Lesson 4: C. AROUND THE HOUSE (C1, C2 )

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe the surroundings around their house. - Develop listening skill ( Listen and choose the right answers). - Describe the position of the surroundings. - Know how to arrange the surroundings around the house. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Mountain, well (Pre): Around, in front of, behind, to the left of, to the right of (a): Tall (v): Look at 2. Grammar: - Wh- question: Where...? - Structure: In front of, there is/ are............ 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: questions and answers, pre- teach, picture drill, chatting D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, pictures E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins)

Teachers activities Check up: (4 mins) - Questions: - Where do you live? - What is there next to your house? - Where does your father work?

Students activities

Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 68 and answer the question - Listen and write down. what there are near the house. - Introduce the new lesson (describe surroundings around the houses - Listen to and develop listening skill)

Presentation (10 minutes) - Introduce the new words - Guess the meaning of the words. + Around, in front of, behind, to the left of, to the right of (pre): ( Explanation) + Look at (v): ( Translation) + Tall (a): ( Explanation) + Well, mountain (n): (Picture) - Repeat and read. - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Read words loudly - Listen and copy - Introduce the new items and make sure Ss to understand. + In front of, there is/ are.......... + Where is/ are + noun? - Listen - Play the tape C1 Practice (10minutes) - Ask Ss to read C1 and answer the questions in pairs. - Read C1 and answer the questions. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions loudly. - Ask and answer the questions - Correct loudly. *Answer key: a. The yard is in front of the house. b. The tall trees are behind the house. c. The mountains are behind the tall trees. d. The well is to the left of the house. e. The flowers are to the right to the house. f. the house is between the well and the flowers. Production (4 minutes) - Ask Ss to answer the questions: - Answer. + Where is the table? + Where are the books? - Call on Ss to answer loudly. Pre- listening (4 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at pairs of picture in C2 and compare them. - Look at the pictures and - Elicit new word: + a lot of , very, some(a) : ( translation) compare. - Ask Ss to listen and choose the right answers. - Prepare to listen. While- listening (4 minutes) - Play the tape twice. - Listen and choose answers. - Call on some Ss to give answers. - Give answers. - Listen and correct with Ss. * Answer key: a) A b) B c) B Post- Listening (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to describe the surroundings around the house. - Describe surroundings. - Go around and help if necessary. - Describe loudly. - Call on some Ss to describe loudly. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize - Listen and remember. + Prepositions + Locations of surroundings around the house. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 6 ( c3, c4, c5, c6)

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: November 16 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 18, 2011


Period 36 UNIT 6: PLACES Lesson 5: C. AROUND THE HOUSE (C3, C4, C6)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe the surroundings on the street in the city. - Love the surroundings in the street. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): photocopy store, bakery, Movie Theater, drugstore, police station, toy store, chemists (Pre): opposite, between......and............ (exp): thats right 2. Grammar: - Wh- question: Where is...?- Its............. Where are......?- Theyre............ Which is........?- Its......... 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, guessing game, pair work, group work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, pictures E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) Questions: - Where is/ are.....................? - Look at the picture and describe. Warm-up (2 minutes) - Listen to - Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 70 and describe the surroundings on the street. - Introduce the new lesson (describe surroundings on the street) Presentation (10 minutes) - Introduce the new words - Guess the meaning of the + Opposite, between......and........ (pre): ( Explanation) words. + Thats right (exp): ( Translation) + Photocopy store, bakery, Movie Theater, drugstore, police station, toy store, chemists (n): (Picture) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Repeat and read. - Revise how to answer the questions with where is/ are....? And - Listen and copy make sure Ss to understand. - Play the tape C3 - Listen Practice (13minutes) - Ask Ss to Look at C3 and answer the questions in pairs. - Read C1 and answer the Where is the....................? questions. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions loudly. - Ask and answer the questions - Correct loudly. *Answer key: Where is the photocopy store/ bakery/ movie theater/ restaurant/ police station/ toy store? - The photocopy store is next to the bakery.

- The bakery is between the movie theater and the photocopy store. - The movie theater is next to the bakery. - The restaurant is opposite the drugstore. - The police station is next to the restaurant. - The toy store is between the police station and the bookstore. Production (10 minutes) * Guessing game: - Ask Ss to read example in C4 b) - Ask Ss to work in groups and play the game as example and eliciting. ( One group give cues, the other guess the surroundings). - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on Ss to play. * Answer key: 1. Its toy store. 2. Its the movie theater. 3. its the photocopy store or the movie theater. 4. Its the photocopy store. 5. its the bakery or the drugstore. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize + Prepositions + Structures in Remember part. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare the period test.

- Pay attention. - Work in groups.

- play as teachers guide.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Period 37; Week 13 Date of preparation:November 3rd, 2009 ONE PERIOD TEST (The second time) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Use old knowledge to do the test - Control the better way of learning in next lessons. After the lesson, teacher can change the method to help Ss learn better. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review) 2. Grammar: (Review) 3. Language skills: reading, writing, language focus C/ Techniques: observation D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers. E/ Content of the test I/ Khoanh trn vo mt t ng nht trong mi cu. (3 im)

1. _______________are you in? I am in grade 6.

A. Which grade B Which class C. How many D. Where 2. Thu ____________school is big. There are nine hundred students in her school. A.is B. 's C. Are D. am 3. Half past ten. =____________ A. Nine forty five B. Ten fifteen C. Ten thirty D. A quarter past ten 4. Lan ___________her face everyday. A. wash B. Washes C. Watch D. watches 5. We have English ____________Monday and Tuesday. A. in B. at C. On D. of 6. Where is your classroom? It's on the first ______________. A. class B. toystore C. School D. floor II/ Khoanh trn vo mt p n sai trong mi cu sau. (1 im) 1. There is a tall tree in front on the house. A B C D

Date of preparation: November 21 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 23 , 2011


Period 38; UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 1: A. IS YOUR HOUSE BIG? (A1, A3, A5, A7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe the house and the surroundings around it. - Ask and answer about surroundings around the house. - Develop listening skill, listen and choose the right picture. - Love the surroundings around the house. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): bank, supermarket, post office, hour * letter, friend, flower garden, vegetable garden, photo (Pre): among (a): old, any 2. Grammar: - Structures: + Is it....?- yes, it is/ no, it isnt + Is there.....?- yes, there is/ no, there isnt. + Are there any......?- yes, there are/ no, there arent 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, group work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, pictures E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities

Check up: (3 mins) - Questions: - Where is/ are.....................? - Which is..................? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 72 and describe the surroundings around the house - Introduce the new lesson (describe surroundings around the house) Presentation (10 minutes) - Introduce the new words and structures + Old (a): ( Explanation) + Is it....?- yes, it is/ no, it isnt + Is there.....?- yes, there is/ no, there isnt. + Are there any......?- yes, there are/ no, there arent - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures then make sure Ss to understand the new structures. - Play the tape A1 - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on two pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Correct Ss pronunciation. Practice (7 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and about their house in pairs. - Elicit the questions: + Is your house small? + Is it new (old)? + Is there a well? + Is there a yard? + Are there any trees? + Are there any flowers? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions loudly. - Correct Production (8 minutes) * Picture drill: A3/ Page 74: - Elicit new words and guide Ss to read the them. + Bank, supermarket, post office, hour (n): (picture) - Ask Ss to work in pairs, point to the picture, ask and answer the questions: + What is that?/ what are those? - Ask Ss to read the examples in A3 b). - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs based in pictures in A3. + Is there a.................near your house?- yes, there is/ no there isnt. + Are there any................near your house?- Yes, there are/ no there arent. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer aloud. Activity (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at three pictures in A4 and give difference among them. - Ask Ss to listen and choose the right picture. - Play the tape three times - Call on Ss to give answers. - Play the tape again and check Ss answers. Answer key: picture A - Look at the picture and describe. - Listen to

- Guess the meaning of the words.

- Repeat and read. - Listen and copy - Listen - Work in pairs. - read the dialogue in pairs.

- Ask and answer the questions in pairs.

- Ask and answer the questions loudly. - Pay attention. - Work in groups.

- Play as teachers guide.

- Look at the pictures and compare. - listen and choose the right picture. - Give answer. - correct.

Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize :+ A7 + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 7 ( B1, B2) F/ Self- Evaluation:

- Listen and remember.

...

Date of preparation: November 2 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 4 , 2011


Period:39
A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe the surroundings and objects in the town and in the country. - Develop reading skill. - Love the surroundings in the town or in the country. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): apartment, zoo, clinic, paddy field, market (adv): very (a): noisy, quiet 2. Grammar: - Structures: - near the apartment, her house, there is/ are............. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, multiple choice, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, pictures E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: Is there/ are there any..................near your house? - Ss answer Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at 2 pictures on page 76, 77 and guess - Look at the pictures and guess. where they are. - Listen to - Introduce the new lesson (describe surroundings near the apartment and house in the town and in the country) Pre- reading (10 minutes)

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 2: B. TOWN OR COUNTRY (B1, B2)

Introduce the new words and structures + Apartment (AE) (n): (Translation)= Flat (BE) + Clinic (n): (Picture) + Market (n): (Explanation) + Zoo (n): (Picture- Explanation) + Noisy (a) :(Translation) + Quiet (a): (antonym) + Very (adv): (Translation) + Near his apartment, near her house, there is/ there are......... - Guide Ss to read the new words and structures then make sure Ss to understand the new structures. While- reading (16minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Call on 2 Ss to read the passages loudly. - Correct their pronunciation. * Multiple choice: - Ask Ss to read 2 passages silently and choose the right answers in groups. - Read the questions and ask Ss to read the answers. - Call on Ss to ask and answer loudly. - Correct and give answers. * Answer key: a. Yes, he does b. No, he doesnt c. yes, it is. d. No, she doesnt e. No, there arent f. Yes, it is. Post- reading 10 minutes) * Write it- up: b2/ page 77 - Ask Ss to read information about Ba and write a small paragraph about Chi. - Help with the use of pronouns - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some Ss to read their writings. * Answer key: Chi lives in a house in the country. Near her house, there arent any stores. There are trees and flowers, a river, a lake, and paddy field. It is very quiet. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize + Structures related to + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 7 ( B3, B4)

- Guess the meaning of the words.

- Repeat and read. - Listen and copy

- Listen to the tape. - Read the passages loudly. - Read the passages and choose the answers. - Answer. - Ask and answer the questions loudly.

- Read example about Ba and write about Chi. - Pay attention. - Read the writings loudly.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: November 2 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 4 , 2011


UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 3: B. TOWN OR COUNTRY (B3, B4) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Develop listening skill, listen and choose the right answers. - practice answering yes/ no questions do/ does. - Love the surroundings in the town or in the country. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review) 2. Grammar: (Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, Grid, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Describe as B2 (read loudly) - Near my house, there are....... Warm-up (2 minutes) - Introduce the new lesson (listen and check) - Listen to Pre- Listening (10 minutes) - Make sure Ss to understand words in the box in B3 - Ask Ss to guess check and cross in B3 on page 77 - Write the prediction on the board While- Listening (17minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Call on Ss to give answers - Play the tape again and check the answers. * Answer key: - Listen - Guess - Listen and check. - Give answers. - Listen And check

Name Minh Tuan Nga

City v X v

Town x v x

Country x x x

Apartment v x x

House x v v

Post- Listening (10 minutes) * Questions and answers: 1. Does Minh live in an apartment? 2. Does Tuan live in the country? 3. Where does Nga live? - Ask Ss to answer from the listening key. - Help Ss answer if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions loudly. * Answer key: 1. Yes, he does 2. no, he doesnt 3. Nga lives in the city in a house. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in B4 - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 7 ( C1, C2)

- Answer the questions from the listening key. - read answers aloud.

- Ask and answer. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: November 27 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 29 , 2011 UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 4: C. ON THE MOVE (C1, C3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about means of transport. - Ask and answer others means of transport. - Love their means of transport B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): bike, motorbike, bus, car, plane, train (v): walk, travel (pre): by (exp): on the move, on foot 2. Grammar: - Structures: + how do you go/ travel.....?- I go/ travel by...... + how does he go/ travel....?- he goes/ travels by..../... 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: - Do you live in country? - Are there any trees near your house? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to talk how they go to school. - Answer - Introduce the new lesson (talk about means of transport) Presentation (10 minutes) - Introduce the phrase; on the move - Introduce the new words: + Bike, motorbike, bus, car, train, plane (n): (picture, explanation) + Travel, walk (v): (translation, mine) Period : 41

- Listen to - Copy down. - Guess the meaning of the words. - Repeat and read. - Read new words loudly.

- Guide Ss to read the new words. - Take note. - Call on Ss to read the new words loudly. - Introduce the structures: + How do/does .........go to school? - ......go/ goes to school by...../ on foot + How do/ does........travel to work? - .......travel/ travels - Pay attention. by...../on foot - Listen - Make sure Ss to understand the new structures. - Ask and answer loudly. - Play the tape C1 - Call on some Ss to ask and answer the question How do you go to school in C1 loudly. - Correct their pronunciation Practice (20minutes) * Picture Drill: - Let Ss Read The Example In C1. - Read example - Ask Ss To Look At 5 Pictures In C1 And Ask About Means - Work in pairs. Of Transport Of People In The Pictures. - Call On Some Pairs To Ask And Answer Loudly. * Answer Key: How does lien/ thu/ tuan/ hoa/ huong go to school? She/ he goes to school by bike/ motorbike/ bus/ car/ on foot. * Picture Drill: - Ask Ss to guess How Mr. Hai And Mrs. Lan travel. - Guess - Play the tape and ask Ss to check their guessing. - Listen and check - Ask Ss to ask and answer about two pictures in C2. - Read loudly. - Ask Ss to read example in picture about Mr Ba. - Read example. - Ask Ss to ask and answer as example in pairs. - Ask and answer in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Show their work loudly. - Correct. Answer key: 1. How does Mrs. Hoa travel to work? - She travels on foot/ she walk to travel. 2. How does Mr. Kim travel to work? - He travels to work by train. 3. How does Mrs. Dung travel to work? - She travels to work by car. Production (5 minutes) * Questions and answers: 1. How do you go to school? 2. how does your father/ mother to work? - Ask Ss to answer the questions. - Answer the questions. - Call on some Ss to ask and answer aloud. - Ask and answer loudly - Correct Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words. - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 7 ( C3, C4, C5, C6) F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: November 28 , 2011 Date of teaching : November 30 , 2011 Period : 42 UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 5: C. ON THE MOVE (C3, C4, C6) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Develop listening skill by listening and writing means of transport. - Develop reading skill about habitual actions. - Have a schedule in doing something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Truck, (v): leave, (conj): so 2. Grammar: - Structures: + how do you go/ travel.....?- I go/ travel by...... + how does he go/ travel....?- he goes/ travels by..../... 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, pair work, questions and answers D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: - How do you.................? - How does he/ she ........? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to answer the questions: 1. What time do you get up? 2. What time do you go to school? 3. How do you go to school? - Introduce the new lesson (Read the passage about Hoang, develop listening skill) Pre- Listening (3 minutes) - Make sure Ss to understand words in C3 - Elicit Truck (n): (translation) - Ask Ss to listen and write the means of transports of people in C3 While- Listening (7 minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Call on Ss to give answers - Play the tape again and check the answers. * Answer key: Ba: motorbike Lan: plane Nam: bus Nga: bike Tuan: bus Mrs.Huong: car Mr.Ha: truck Miss.Chi: on foot Post- Listening (6 minutes) * Questions and answers: + How does students name go to school? - Ask Ss to answer from the listening key. - Help Ss answer if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions loudly. - Answer

- Listen to - Listen - Copy down. - Prepare listening. - Listen and write. - Give answers. - Listen and check

- Answer the questions from the listening key. - Read answers aloud.

Pre- reading (5 minutes) - Introduce the content of C4 about Hoang. - Introduce the new words and structures + Leave (v): (Translation) + So (conj): (Translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Ask Ss to guess actions of Hoang in Vietnamese. While- reading (10 minutes) - Play the tape two times. * Questions and answers: - Make sure Ss to understand the meaning of questions in C4. - Ask Ss to read the passage silently and answer the questions in pairs - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer loudly. - Correct and give answers. * Answer key: a. Hoang gets up at half past five. b. He goes to school at half past six. c. No, he doesnt. d. Yes, he does. e. Classes start at seven oclock. f. They end at half past eleven. Post- reading (5 minutes) * Questions: 1. What time do you get up? 2. What time do you go to school? 3. Do you go to school by motorbike? 4. Do you walk to school? 5. What time do your classes start? 6. What time do they end? - Ask Ss answer the questions. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some Ss to answer loudly. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words in C6 and What time...? - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook

- Listen - Guess the meaning of the words. - Repeat and read. - Give guessing. - Listen to the tape. - Pay attention. - Read the passage and answer the questions. - Ask and answer the questions loudly.

- Answer the questions. - Answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: November 30 , 2011 Date of teaching : December 2, 2011 Period 43; CORECTION THE TEST + Test 15 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn from the errors in the tests. - Control better method of learning for next lessons. Teacher can evaluate students knowledge and change suitable method in next teaching lessons.

B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review): 2. Grammar: ( Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chain- game, picture cue drill, pair- work, gap-fill D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) 3. Key I. Chn t thch hp in vo ch trng : 1/b 2/ a 3/ c 4.c 5/ a 6/ b 7/ c 8/c II. Hon thnh on hi thoi cho sn: 1/ What time 2/ Which 3/How many III.Tm li sai : 1/A 2/ A 3/ C 4/ D IV., c on vn v tr li cu hi 1. His name is Minh.. 2. No, he doesnt. 3. His school is in the city. 4. There are 900 students. V. Vit cu da vao cc t gi 1. Ba watches TV after school. 2. There are mountains behind the tall trees. 4. Results Lp Bi HS lm/ s HS 6A3 38 6A4 39 All 77 >= 8 4 10 14 >= 5 9 26 35 < 5 13 3 16 < 3.5 12 0 12

4/When

4. Homework (1 minute) Prepare unit 8: A1, A2, A3. F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

F/ Self- Evaluation: 15 MINUTE TEST (The third time) Nghe va ien vao cho trong: Lan: (1)_________________ do you go to school? Nga: I go to school (2) ______________. What about you? Lan: I (3) ________________ to school. Tam: How do you go to school, Hoa? Hoa: By (4)_______________. How about you, Tam? Tam: I go with my father by (5)__________________.

ANSWER KEY: Moi cau ung at 2 iem. Lan: How do you go to school? Nga: I go to school on foot. What about you? Lan: I walk to school. Tam: How do you go to school, Hoa? Hoa: by bike. How about you, Tam? Tam: I go with my father by motorbike.

Date of preparation: December 4, 2011 Date of teaching: December 6, 2011 Period 44; UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 1: A. WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1, A2, A3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Express what is happening at the time of speaking. - Have right attitude in doing something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): video game (v): ride, drive, wait for 2. Grammar: - present progressive tense: Be+ V-ing. - Structures: + What are you doing?- I am/ we are + V-ing.... + What is he/ she doing? He/ She is +V-ing.... + What are they doing? They are + V-ing.......... 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill , pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: - How do you go to school? - What time do you go to school? - How does your friend go to school? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss cac em ang lam g o? - Answer - Introduce the new lesson (talk about activities at - Listen to speaking) Presentation (10 minutes) - Show the pictures and tell them what are happening in - Listen and pay attention. the pictures - Guess the meaning of the words. - Introduce the new words: + Video game (n): ( Picture) + Ride (v): ( Picture) + Drive (v): (picture) - Repeat and read. + Wait for (v): (Translation) - Read new words loudly.

- Guide Ss to read the new words. - Pay attention and take note. - Call on Ss to read the new words loudly. - Write two sentences on the board and present the grammar point. + I ride my bike # I am riding my bike. - Introduce the structures: - Pay attention. + What are you doing?- I am/ we are + V-ing.... - Listen + What is he/ she doing? He/ She is +V-ing.... + What are they doing? They are + V-ing.......... - Make sure Ss to understand the new structures. - Play the tape A1 - Note: Traveling (AE) # Travelling( BE) Practice (20minutes) - Ask Ss to read sentences loudly in A1. - Read A1 loudly. - Correct pronunciation. * Picture Drill: (A2/ Page 83) - Ask Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering the - Work in pairs. questions. 1. What are you doing? For six pictures in A1. 2. What is he/ she doing? For the first three pictures in A1. 3. What are they doing? For the last three pictures in - Ask and answer loudly. A1 - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct and comment. Production (5 minutes) * Questions, answers and picture drill: (A3/ page 83) - Ask Ss to look at the questions and pictures in A3 then - Answer the questions in pairs. answer them in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly - Call on some Ss to ask and answer aloud. - Write on the board. - Ask Ss to write correct sentences on the board. - Copy down. - Correct. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words. - Listen, practice and remember. - Ask Ss to answer : what are you doing? and elicit how to answer I am learning English - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises A1, A2 on page 72, 73 in workbook - Prepare Unit 8 ( A4, A5, A6, A7) F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: December 5, 2011 Date of teaching: December 7, 2011 Period 54; UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 2: A. WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A4, A6, A7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can:

- Develop listening skill about means of transport using present progressive tense. - Practice using Wh- question words ( Who/ what/ where/ how) about the activities occurring. - Have right attitude in doing something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Businessman 2. Grammar: - Present progressive tense: Be+ V-ing. - Structures: + What/ Where/ How ..............? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill , pair work, questions and answers D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: - What are you doing? - What is students name doing? - What are they doing? (point to students T has just asked.) Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to give the meaning of words: What/ Where/ who/ How) - Introduce the new lesson (Read the model passage then ask and answer based on the small passages, develop listening skill) Pre- Listening (3 minutes) - Elicit businessman (n): (translation) - Elicit the activities in A4:( a. riding the bike b. driving the car c. Walking to school d. traveling by bike e. waiting for a bys f. waiting for a train ) - Ask Ss to listen and number the pictures they hear in A4. While- Listening (7 minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Call on Ss to give answers - Play the tape again and check the answers. * Answer key: 1.b 2.f 3.d 4. a 5. c 6. e Post- Listening (5 minutes) * Questions and answers: + How is he/ she traveling? + What is he/ she doing? - Ask Ss to answer from the listening key or the pictures in A4. - Help Ss answer if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions loudly. Pre- reading (5 minutes) - Hang the picture A3/ a on page 84 and guide Ss to ask and answer the questions. + Who is that? That is Tuan. + What does he do?- He is a student. + Where is he going? He is going to school. + How is he traveling? He is traveling by bike. - Answer - Listen to

- Copy down. - pay attention and copy down. - Prepare listening. - Listen and number. - Give answers. - Listen and check

- Answer the questions from the listening key. - Read answers aloud.

- Listen and take note. - Repeat and read.

- Introduce the content of A6 - Help Ss read content of A6 While- reading (10 minutes) * Questions and answers: - Ask Ss to read the passages in a/ and b/ silently then ask and answer the questions in pairs - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer loudly. - Correct and give answers. * Answer key: a) Who is that? That is Mr.Ha. What does he do?- He is a businessman. Where is he going? He is going to Hanoi. How is he traveling? He is traveling by plane b) Who is that? That is Miss LAN. What does she do?- She is a teacher. Where is she going? She is going to school. How is she traveling? She is traveling on foot. - Guide Ss how to ask and answer with picture c) in A6 + Who are they?- They are............. + What do they do?- They are............. + Where do they going?- they are going................ + How are they traveling?- They are traveling by............. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer information about A6, c) - Call on Ss to give answers. Post- reading ( 5 minutes) * Picture drill: - Show one picture and ask Ss to ask and answer the questions as same as questions above in groups. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some Ss to answer loudly. - Correct. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the structures in A7 and Wh- question words - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises A3, A4 on page 73 in workbook - Prepare Unit 8 ( B1, B2, B3, B4)

- Listen - Listen and read. - Pay attention. - Read the passage and answer the questions. - Ask and answer the questions loudly.

- Listen and take note.

- Work in pairs. - Show their work.

- Work in groups. - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: December 7, 2011 Date of teaching: December 9, 2011 Period 46; UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Lesson 3: B. A TRUCK DRIVER (B1, B2,B4) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about an action happening at the present. - Ask and answer about an action happening at the present. - Arrange a schedule as attention. - Have right attitude in learning. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): truck, truck driver, farm, farmer, food stall, (v): load, unload, arrive at, take, copy, correct 2. Grammar: - Present progressive tense: Be+ V-ing. - Structures: + Quang is arriving at the farm. + Quang and the farmer are loading the truck with vegetables + Are you doing.....?- yes, I am/ No, I am not. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, pair work, questions and answers D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson :( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: - What do you do? - What are you doing? - How are you going to school? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to give the formation of the present progressive - Answer tense. - Introduce the new lesson (read information and answer the questions then know some information about Ba - Listen to using the present progressive tense) Pre- reading (5 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in B1 and introduce the - Listen content of B1. - Introduce the new words. - Guess the meaning of new words. + Truck, truck driver, farm, farmer (n): (Picture, explanation) + Food stall (n): ( explanation) + Load, unload (v): ( Mine, explanation) + Take (v): (Translation) + Arrive at (v): ( Translation) - Repeat and read. + Vegetable (n): (Translation) - Read words loudly. - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Take note. - Call on some Ss to read the new words loudly. - Elicit the structures: + Quang is arriving at the farm. + Quang and the farmer are loading the truck with vegetables While- reading (10 minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Listen. - Call on some Ss to read activities of Mr.Quang aloud. - Read the passage loudly - Correct pronunciation. * Questions and answers:

- Make sure Ss to understand the content of questions from a) to f) on page 87. - Ask Ss to read B1 ask and answer the questions in pairs - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer loudly. - Correct and give answers. * Answer key: a. Mr. Quang is a truck driver. b. At five in the morning, he is going to a farm. c. A farmer is waiting for him. d. He is taking the vegetables to the market. e. He is eating his breakfast at seven o clock. f. He is eating at a food stall. Post- reading (5 minutes) - Ask Ss to correct the form of the verb in the brackets. 1. Nam (ride) ___________________his bike. 2. Hung and ha (learn) __________________now. - Call on some Ss to answer loudly. - Correct. Presentation (5 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the picture in B2 and tell what Ba is doing. - Introduce the new words: + Copy (v): ( Mine, Explanation) + Correct (v): (Translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Call on Ss to read the new words loudly. - Introduce the structures: + Are you doing math? Yes, I am/ No, I am not. + Is he playing soccer? Yes, he is/ No, he isnt. + Are they playing soccer? Yes, they are/ No, they arent. - Make sure Ss to understand the new structures. - Play the tape B2 Practice (8 minutes) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in B2 in pairs. - Call two pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Correct pronunciation. * Questions, answers: (B2/ page 87) - Make sure Ss to understand the meaning of the questions in B2 - Ask Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering the questions. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct and comment. * Answer key: a. Ba is doing his math. b. Yes, he is. c. No, he isnt. d. Tuan is playing soccer. e. No, they arent. Production (5 minutes) * Questions, answers:

- Pay attention - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer the questions loudly.

- Do exercise - Answer loudly. - Listen and answer. - Guess the meaning of the words. - Repeat and read. - Read new words loudly. - Pay attention and take note.

- Listen

- Practice in pairs. - Read the dialogue loudly. - Pay attention. - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly.

- Ask Ss some questions: 1. Are you learning math? 2. Is (Thang) learning English? ..... - Call on some Ss to ask and answer aloud. - Correct. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the structures in B4 and let Ss ask and answer. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises B1, B2, B3, B4 on page 73, 74 in workbook - Prepare Unit 8 (C1, C2)

-Answer the questions in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly - Copy down.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: . Date of preparation: December 11, 2011 Date of teaching: December 13, 2011 Period 47; UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 4: ROAD SIGNS (C1, C2) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Identify the road signs. - Understand and talk tocan or cant for permission and prohibition. - Have right attitude in obeying traffic law. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Road sign, policeman, job (v): Can, cant, go ahead, turn left, turn right, park, go into (a): Difficult 2. Grammar: - Modals: Can/ Cant - Structures: + You can park here. + You cant go into that street. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, gap- fill, picture drill, pair work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, road signs E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Questions: - Answer - What are you doing? - Is (Nam) learning English? - Listen to - Are they learning English? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss khi i ng em i ben nao?- Em phai chap hanh luat g? - Introduce the new lesson (know some road signs and obey them with can or cant.)

Presentation (10 minutes) - Show some road signs and ask Ss to say the meaning of them. - Introduce the new words: + Policeman (n): (Picture) + Difficult (a): (Translation) + Job (n): (Synonym) + Sign (n): ( Picture) + Park(v): ( Translation) + Can / Cant (v): (Explanation) + Turn left, Turn right, go ahead (v): (Picture) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Call on Ss to read the new words loudly. - Guide Ss with colors( red, blue, yellow) to introduce the road signs with modals: can/ cant(cannot) - Make sure Ss to understand the new structures. - Play the tape C1 Practice (14minutes) - Ask Ss to read sentences loudly in C1. - Correct pronunciation. * Gap fill: (C2/ Page 89, 90) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and fill in the gaps with can/ cant - Call on Ss to give answers. - Correct and comment. * Answer key: a. can b. cant c. can d. cannot (cant) Production (11 minutes) * Picture drill: - Hang the road signs and ask Ss to ask and answer the question. What does the sign say? - Guide Ss to answer the question based to the road sign. - Call on some Ss to ask and answer aloud. - Ask Ss to write correct sentences on the board. - Correct. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises C1 on page 75 in workbook - Prepare Unit 8 ( C3, C4, C5, C6)

- Listen and pay attention. - Guess the meaning of the words.

- Repeat and read. - Read new words loudly. - Pay attention and take note. - Pay attention. - Listen

- Read C1 loudly. - Look at the pictures and fill in the gaps. - Give answers.

- Work in pairs. - Pay attention. - Ask and answer loudly - Write on the board. - Copy down. - Listen, practice and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: December 13, 2011 Date of teaching: December 15, 2011 Period 48; UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 5: ROAD SIGNS (C3, C4, C6) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Identify the road signs. - Understand and talk to Must and must not for obligation or prohibition. - Develop listening skill to decide right road signs.

- Have right attitude in obeying traffic law. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Accident, discipline, intersection (v): Slowdown, go fast, stop, cross, help, warn, stop, Go straight ahead, Must, and must not. (a): Dangerous 2. Grammar: - Modals: Must, Must not. - Structures: + you must slowdown. + You must not go fast. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, matching D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, road signs E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Hang up road signs and ask what does the sign say? - Answer - Listen to Warm-up (2 minutes) - Show the sign stop and ask Ss to give the meaning of the sign. - Introduce the new lesson (know some road signs, obey them with must and must not and listen to find the right road signs) Presentation (8 minutes) - Introduce the new words: - Guess the meaning of the words. + Accident, discipline, intersection (n): (Explanation, Translation, Picture) + Slowdown, go fast, stop, cross, help, warn, stop, go straight ahead, must, and must not (v): Picture, Translation, explanation) + Dangerous (a): (Translation) - Repeat and read. - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Read new words loudly. - Call on Ss to read the new words loudly. - Pay attention and take note. - Guide Ss with the road signs with modals: Must and must not. - Pay attention. - Make sure Ss to understand the new structures. - Listen - Play the tape C3 Practice (8 minutes) - Ask Ss to read sentences loudly in C3. - Correct pronunciation. * Question and answer: - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in C3 and answer the question What does the sign say? - Call on Ss to give answers. - Correct and comment. * Answer key: Content in C3 Production (5 minutes) * Picture drill: - Hang the road signs and ask Ss to ask and answer the question. What does the sign say? - Guide Ss to answer the question based to the road sign. - Call on some Ss to ask and answer aloud. - Ask Ss to write correct sentences on the board. - Correct.

- Read C3 loudly. - Look at the pictures answer the question. - Give answers.

- Work in pairs. - Pay attention. - Ask and answer loudly - Write on the board. - Copy down.

Pre- Listening (3 minutes) - Ask Ss the meaning of the road signs in C4. - Help if necessary. - Write the meaning of the road signs on the board. a/ Intersection b/ can turn left c/ cant turn right d/ must stop e/ cant park here f/ cant ride motorbike g/ go ahead h/ can park - Ask Ss to listen and number the pictures they hear in C4. While- Listening (7 minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Call on Ss to give answers - Play the tape again and check the answers. * Answer key: 1.c 2.d 3.h 4. a 5. g 6. b 7. f 8. e Post- Listening (4 minutes) * Play with words: C5/ Page 91 - Play the tape. - Ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Call on Ss to read C5 loudly. - Correct the pronunciation. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words in C6 and in the lesson. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises C2, C3, C4 on page 75, 76 in workbook - Prepare grammar practice

- Answer - Pay attention and copy down. - Prepare listening. - Listen and number. - Give answers. - Listen and check

- Listen - Listen and repeat - Read C5 aloud. - Listen, practice and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: December 14, 2011 Date of teaching: December 16, 2011 Period 49; GRAMMAR PRACTICE A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Practice using present simple, present progressive tenses, prepositions, modals. - Further practice in asking and answering question words. - Have good ways in consolidating. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (v): carry (Adv): now, at the moment 2. Grammar: - The present simple tense - The present progressive tense - Prepositions - Question words - Modals 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Gap- fill, Picture drill, pair work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson: (44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities

Check up: (3mins) Questions: - What time is it? - How do you go to school? - What are you doing? Warm-up (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to say what they learned in previous units. - Introduce the new lesson. Activity1 (19 minutes) * Gap- fill: ( 1/2/5 Present simple tense, present progressive tense and both) (Page 92, 94) - Elicit the formation, use, and clues of the present simple tense, and present progressive tense - Ask Ss to use right form of verbs in the brackets then ask and answer in pairs in 1and individuals in 2/ 5. - Call on 3 pairs to ask and answer in 1 loudly then give the answers in 2 and 5. - Correct. Answer key: 1)a. go/ go b. travel/ travels c. walk/ dont walk/ Does...walk/ walks 2) a. is riding b. are waiting c. is watching d. are playing e. is listening f. are walking g. is traveling 5) b. rides/ is riding c. go/ are going d. walk/ am walking e. drives/ is driving Activity 2 (6 minutes) * Picture drill: ( 2. Prepositions: Page 93) - Revise how to use the prepositions in the box. - Ask Ss to look at the picture then find the suitable prepositions in the box to fill in the gaps. - Ask Ss to work in groups. - Call on some Ss to give answer. - Correct Answer key: In/ in front of/ behind/ opposite/ to the right of/ to the left of Activity 3 (4 minutes) * Questions and answers ( 4. Question words/ Page 93) - Elicit new word: + Carry - Ask Ss to find the right question words to fill in the gaps. - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Answer key: 4/ a. Where b. Who c. What d. What Activity 4 (5 minutes) * Gap- fill: ( 6/ 7 modals/ Page 94, 95) - Ask Ss to retell the use of modals with must/ must not/ can/ cannot - Ask Ss to look at the picture and fill in the gaps with the right modals above. - Call on some Ss to give answers. - Correct.

- Answer - Listen to

- Pay attention - Work in pairs and individuals. - Give answers

- Pay attention - Work in groups - Give answers loudly.

- Take notes - Fill in the gaps. - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Take notes

- Pay attention - Work in pairs and individuals. - Give answers

Answer key: 6/ a. must/ must not b. must/ must not/ must not c. must/ must not 7/ a. cant b. can c cant Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare for review.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: December 18, 2011 Date of teaching: December 20, 2011 Period 50; ON TAP, CHUAN B KIEM TRA HOC KY I A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Understand and use the old knowledge related to grammar points. - Read a passage and answer the questions. - Write passage based on the cues provided. - Have right attitude in doing exercises. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: +Names of house objects. + Words describing family members + Names occupations + Numbers from 1 to 100 2. Grammar: + Present simple of Tobe (is/ am/ are) + Wh- questions: How? How old? How many? What? Where? Who? + Personal pronouns: I, we, she, he, you, they + Possessive pronouns: my, her, his, your + Indefinite articles: a/ an + Imperatives: come in, sit down, stand up.... + Demonstration pronouns: this/ that/ these/ those + There is/ there are... 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Eliciting, observation D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Warm-up (1 minute) * Quiz: - Ask Ss Who dont you see but you fear? - Introduce the new lesson Activity 1 (15 minutes) - Help Ss revise the old knowledge related to:

- Guess - Listen to - Answer what T asks.

+Names of house objects. + Words describing family members + Names occupations + Numbers from 1 to 100 + Present simple of Tobe (is/ am/ are) + Wh- questions: How? How old? How many? What? Where? Who? + Personal pronouns: I, we, she, he, you, they + Possessive pronouns: my, her, his, your + Indefinite articles: a/ an + Imperatives: come in, sit down, stand up.... + Demonstration pronouns: this/ that/ these/ those + There is/ there are... - Listen and pay attention. - Give examples to make sure Ss to understand and use words and the grammar points. Activity 2 (24minutes) * Fill in the blanks with one suitable word. - Do exercises. 1. I _________a student. 2. _________are you? I am fine, thank you. 3. How _______________is she? She is 13 years old. 4. How many ___________are there in your family? 5.___________does she do? She is a teacher. 6. Where is ____________house? Its in the country. 7. This is Nga. ____________is 13. 8. This is my sister. ___________name is Lan. 9. My father is _____________engineer. 10. come ___________. 11. What is ________? Its a pen. 12. How many books are there? There _____________three books. * Read the passage and answer the questions: Good evening, I am Lan. This is my family. There are four people in my family. My father, my mother, my brother and me. This is my father. He is a teacher. He is 35 years old. This is my mother. She is 34 years old. She is a teacher , too. My brother is 17 years old. He is a student. 1. How many people are there in Lans family? 2. How old is her father? 3. What does he do? 4. How old is her mother? 5. What does she do? 6. How old is her brother? III/ Write a small passage using following diagram. Father (Nam- 35) Mother ( Lan- 34) Hung (10) and Thu (6) - Help Ss do exercises. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and Words related to. - Give the period of the lesson. . Homework (1 minute) - Learn words and structures by heart . F/ Self- Evaluation:

- Listen and remember.

Date of preparation: December 19, 2011 Date of teaching: December 21, 2011 Period 51; ON TAP, CHUAN B KIEM TRA HOC KY I A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Understand and use the old knowledge related to grammar points. - Read a passage and answer the questions. - Write sentences using words provided. - Have right attitude in doing exercises. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: +Words describing school facilities + Words describing a timetable + Words to talk about school subjects + Ordinal numbers from first to tenth + Words describing time 2. Grammar: + Present simple : Have, get up, brush, wash, go + Wh- questions: What time? How many? Which? + Yes/ no questions: Do/ Does + Possessive case + Adjectives: big, small, beautiful + Prepositions of time: at, on, in + Prepositions of places: at, on, in 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Eliciting, observation D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 43 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Warm-up (1 minute) - Introduce the new lesson - Listen to Activity 1 (15 minutes) - Help Ss revise the old knowledge related to: - Answer what T asks. +Words describing school facilities + Words describing a timetable + Words to talk about school subjects + Ordinal numbers from first to tenth + Words describing time + Present simple : Have, get up, brush, wash, go + Wh- questions: What time? How many? Which? + Yes/ no questions: Do/ Does + Possessive case + Adjectives: big, small, beautiful + Prepositions of time: at, on, in + Prepositions of places: at, on, in - Listen and pay attention. - Give examples to make sure Ss to understand and use words and the grammar points. Activity 2 (24minutes) * Fill in the blanks with one suitable word.

1. ____________do you get up? 2. __________she go to school at six? 3. We have English ____________Monday. 4. My school is ___________the country. 5. She goes to school ______________six oclock. * Use the right form of the words in the brackets. 1. She (get)___________up at six. 2. Students (go) _____________to school everyday. 3. Do they ( have)______________math on Monday? 4. Nga ( brush) _____________her teeth every morning. 5. I (play) _____________soccer every afternoon. * Read the passage and answer the questions: * Linh is twelve years old . He is in grade 6. He lives in a house with his mother , father and sister . Their house is next to a bookstore. In the neighborhood, there is a restaurant, a market and a stadium. Linhs father works in a restaurant . His mother works in a market . Linh goes to school every morning . He has classes from seven to fifteen past eleven. Every morning , Bi gets up at six. He watches his face and brushes his teeth. At six thirty he eats breakfast , then he goes to school . At twelve thirty , he goes home and has lunch . In the afternoon , he plays soccer . In the evening , he does his homework , then watches television. 1. What does Bi do ? 2. What time does he get up every morning ? 3. What does he do after breakfast ? 4. Does he go to school in the afternoon ? 5. What does he do in the evening ? * Thus school is in the city. Its on Tran Phu Street . It s a big school . It has three floors and twenty classrooms . Thu is in grade six. Her classroom is on the second floor . Thu goes to school in the morning. She has classes from seven to half past eleven . 1. Is Thus school small or big ? 2. How many classrooms are there in her school ? 3. Where is her classroom ? III/ Write sentences using words provided: 1. Everyday/ get up/ 6.00. 2. Go/ school/ 6.30. - Do exercises. 3. Have/ classes/ 7.00/ 11.15. 4. Go/ home/ 11.30. 5. Have/ lunch/ 12.00. 6. Go/ bed/ 22.00. - Help Ss do exercises. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and Words related to. - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn words and structures by heart. F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: December 21, 2011 Date of teaching: December 23, 2011 Period 52; ON TAP, CHUAN B KIEM TRA HOC KY I A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Understand and use the old knowledge related to grammar points. - Read a passage and answer the questions. - Write sentences using words provided. - Have right attitude in doing exercises. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: + Names of public places in the community. + Means of transportation 2. Grammar: + tenses: Present simple , Present progressive + Wh-questions: How? Where? What? Which? + Yes/ no questions: Is there...? Are there....? Do you....? + Modal verbs: Can/ Cant/ must/ mustnt + Adjectives: Quiet/ noisy + Adverbial phrases: by bike, by bus + Prepositions of position: next to, behind....: + Articles: A/ an, the 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Eliciting, observation D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Warm-up (1 minute) - Listen to - Introduce the new lesson Activity 1 (15 minutes) - Help Ss revise the old knowledge related to: - Answer what T asks. + Names of public places in the community. + Means of transportation + tenses: Present simple , Present progressive + Wh- questions: How? Where? What? Which? + Yes/ no questions: Is there...? Are there....? Do you....? + Modal verbs: Can/ Cant/ must/ mustnt + Adjectives: Quiet/ noisy + Adverbial phrases: by bike, by bus + Prepositions of position: next to, behind....: + Articles: A/ an, the - Listen and pay attention. - Give examples to make sure Ss to understand and use words and the grammar points. Activity 2 (24minutes) * Fill in the blanks with one suitable word. 1. They go to school ______________ bike. 2. Are there ______________trees near your house? 3. It is ___________in the city. 4. My school is ___________to the store 5. Her school is in ______________country.

* Use the right form of the words in the brackets. 1. She (get)___________up at six every day. 2. Nga and Thu ( watch)_____________TV now. 3. This sign says. You must (stop) _____________. 4. Nga ( brush) _____________her teeth every morning. 5. I (play) _____________soccer at the moment. * Read the passage and answer the questions: I) Trang is a teacher . She teaches at a small school in the village . She gets up at six . Every morning she leaves the house at quarter to seven . The school is not near her house ; so she goes to work by bicycle . Her class starts at seven and ends at eleven . My sister rides home and has lunch at quarter to twelve . 1. What does Trang do ? 2. Where does she teach ? 3. What time does she get up ? 4. Is the school near her house ? 5. How does she go to work ? II) This is my friend . Her name is Linh . She goes to school from Monday to Saturday. Her school is on Nguyen Cao Thang Street and it is big. It has five floors . Linh classroom is on the third floor . She is in grade 6 class 6A. There are thirtytwo students in her class. Linh starts her classes at 2 oclock in the afternoon and finishes them at 4:30. On Monday she has math, literature and English. After school Linh plays badminton , but her friend , Lien doesnt play it; she plays volleyball . Linh goes home at 5:30. 1. Where is Linh s school ? 2. How many floors does her school have ? 3. Which class is she in ? 4. What time does she start her classes? 5. Does Lien play badminton ? III/ Write sentences using words provided: 1. Live/ house/ country. - Do exercises. 2. Get/ 6.00 3. Go/ school/ 6.30. 4. Have/ classes/ 7.00/ 11.15. 5. Go/ home/ have lunch/ 11.30. 6. Go/ bed/ 22.00. 7. There/ be/ yard/ front/ house. 8. There/ be/ flowers/ left/ house. - Help Ss do exercises. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and Words related to. - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn words and structures by heart. F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: December 25, 2011 Date of teaching: December 27, 2011 Period 53; ON TAP, CHUAN B KIEM TRA HOC KY I A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Make accustomed to some type of testing then practice doing these exercises. - Have right attitude in doing exercises. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: ( Review) 2. Grammar: ( Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Eliciting, observation D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 38 mins)

Teachers activities Check up: (5) Students talk about the knowledge related to grammar points. Warm-up (1 minute) - Introduce the new lesson Activity 1 (7 minutes) - Give Ss some kinds of exercises in the test. Choose the wrong answers + Choose the right answers + Odd one out + Read the passage and answer the questions. + Write sentences using words provided Activity 2 (27minutes) I/ Gch chn vo mt t ng nht trong mi cu. (3 im) 1. Lan does _____________homework in the evening. (his/ her/ their/ our) 2. The sign says: no right turn. You _____________turn right. (must not/ cannot/ can/ must) 3. I go to school at 7 oclock ____________ Monday. (with/ to/ on/ in) 4. What do you do after school? I listen to ________ ( games/ music/ soccer/ homework) 5. A teacher works on a __________. (house/ factory/ farm/ school) 6. They watch television every day. We ______________volleyball today. ( play/ plays/ is playing/ are playing) II/ Khoanh trn vo mt p n sai trong mi cu sau. (2 im) 1. Our classes start at a quarter eleven. A B C 2. Where are you waiting for? I am waiting for Nam. A B C 3. Whats your name? My name are Thu. A B C 4. My house is on a booksore and a toystore. A B C III/ Em hy khoanh trn mt t khng cng loi vi 3 t cn li ( 1 im) 1. A. Train B. Bus C. Flower D. Car 2. A. Teacher B. Doctor C. Sit down D. Farmer 3. A. On B. Of C. Next to D. Sit 4. A. Father B. Mother C. Sister D. Big IV/ Lm theo yu cu trong ngoc. (1.5 im) 1. She (watch) ________________television everyday. ( Dng ng hnh thc ca ng t trong ngoc) 2. She/ wash/ her face/ now. ( Dng t cho vit thnh cu hon chnh) 3. Are there _____________books on the desk?- Yes, there are. (in vo ch trng bng mt t thch hp) V/ c on vn v tr li cu hi. (2 im) Hi. My name is Nam. I am a student. I get up at haft past five. I take a shower and get dressed. I go to school at six and go home at half past eleven. After school, I play soccer. I listen to music every afternoon. but at the moment, I am doing homework. 1. What time does Nam get up?

Students activities

- Listen to - Listen and pay attention.

- Read the request of sentences and do exercises.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

SECOND TERM OF ENGLISH 6

Date of preparation: January 7, 2012 Date of teaching: January 9, 2012 UNIT 9: THE BODY Lesson 1: A. PARTS OF THE BODY ( A1, A2, A3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Name parts of the body. - Describe the physical appearance of a person. - Love and protect parts of their body. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): body, head, shoulder, arm, chest, hand, finger, led, foot, feet, toe, part (adj): tall, short, thin, fat, heavy, light 2. Grammar: - Structures: + What is this/ that? What are these/ those? ( Review) - She/ he is + adjective. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, Noughts and crosses, matching, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2 New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up (no) Warm-up (2 minutes) - Show some parts of a body and ask Ss to tell them in English. - Introduce the new lesson (name parts of the body, describe - Answer the appearance of the body) - Listen to Presentation (13 minutes) - Introduce the words by using the picture/ drawing of T - Guess the meaning of the words. + Body, head, shoulder, arm, chest, hand, finger, led, foot, feet, - Repeat and read. toe, part - Read new words loudly. - Guide Ss to read the new words - Work in groups * Matching: - Guess the meaning of the new words - Write new words and draw a picture on the board then ask - Repeat the new words. Ss to match words and parts in the body. - Read words aloud - Divide Ss into 2 groups to play. - Take notes - Introduce the new words: + Tall, short, thin, fat, heavy, light (adj): (picture, explanation, - Pay attention. antonym) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Call on Ss to read the new words loudly. - Introduce the structures: - Listen + She/ He is fat.. - Read loudly. - Make sure Ss to understand the new structures about form, meaning and use. - Play the tape A3 - Call on some Ss to read A3 loudly. - Correct their pronunciation Practice (20minutes) * Picture Drill: - Ask Ss to look at the picture then ask and answer the - Look at the picture questions What is this/ that? And What are these/ those? - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs. - Work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Ask and answer loudly

* Noughts and crosses: Small Light slim Tall Short Fat heavy big Thin - Ask Ss to play in groups. The first one to get straight line of the three noughts or three crosses is the winner, each square is a cue, Ss to make correct sentence - Guide Ss to play. Production (5 minutes) * Simon says: - Guide Ss to play. T: Simon says Touch your head Ss: ( Touch their head) T: Touch your head Ss: Do nothing Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1m ) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 9 ( A4, A5, A7)

- Play as Teachers guide.

- Play as Teachers guide

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: January 7, 2012 Date of teaching: January 11, 2012 UNIT 9: THE BODY Lesson 2: A. PARTS OF THE BODY ( A4, A5, A7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Develop listening skill about describing physical appearance. - Develop reading skill about describing the physical appearance of a person. - Know how to keep fit. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): gymnast, weight lifter, man, woman (adj): weak, strong 2. Grammar: ( Review)- She/ he is + adjective. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, group work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2 New lesson:( 44ms ) Teachers activities Students activities Check up ( 5ms ) - Point and ask Ss :what is this ? - what are these ? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Use a picture and set the situation of the new lesson. - Answer - Introduce the new lesson (describe appearance of a person by listening and - Listen to

reading) Pre- listening (4 minutes) - Introduce the situation of the listen part. - Introduce the new words + Man, woman (n): (eliciting) - Guide Ss to read the new words and phrases. * Matching prediction: Short, fat, tall, thin - Ask Ss to guess and match adjectives with pictures in A4 - Write Ss prediction on the board. - Ask Ss to prepare listening and choose the right answers. While- listening (8 minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Ask Ss to give their answers. - Play the tape again and correct the Ss answers. Answers key: 1. d 2.c 3. b 4.a Post- listening (4 minutes) * Picture description: - Ask Ss to look at the picture and describe in groups - Call some Ss from each group to answer loudly. - Correct. Pre- reading (3 minutes) - Introduce the new words in A5 + Gymnast , weight lifter(n): (picture- Explanation) + weak, strong : (v): ( work) - Guide Ss to read the new words. While- reading (9minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud. - Correct the pronunciation. * Questions and answers: 1. What does chi do? 2. Is she small? 3. Is she light? - Ask Ss to read A5 a) and answer the questions. - Call on some Ss to give answers. - Correct * Answer key: 1. She is a gymnast 2. No, she isnt 3. Yes, she is Post- reading (5 minutes) * Picture drill; - Give a picture and ask Ss to describe as A5 - Help Ss if necessary - Call on some Ss to describe loudly. - Correct. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words in A6 - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1m ) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Listen - Read the passage loudly

- Listen - Guess the meaning - Repeat and read in chorus & one. - Guess and match.

-Listen and check their guessing. - Give answers. - Listen and check again. - Take notes. - Work In Groups. - Show their work. - Guess the meaning of the words. - Repeat and read. - Read words loudly

- Read A5 a) and answer the questions. - Give answers.

- look at the picture and describe - Read answers loudly. - Listen and remember.

- Prepare Unit 9 ( B1) F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: January 11, 2012 Date of teaching: January 13, 2012 UNIT 9: THE BODY Lesson 3: B. FACES (B1) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe faces. - Identify the face appearance of a person. - Take care of other people. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Face, hair, eye, nose, mouth, ear, lips, teeth (tooth) (adj): round, oval, full, thin, long, short 2. Grammar: - Structures: She/ he has+ adjective + noun 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2 New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) Show a picture/ Draw a picture and ask Ss some questions about parts of the body and physical appearance. Warm-up(2 minutes) - Draw some faces in different shapes and ask Ss to comment. - Introduce the new lesson ( describe face) Presentation( 8 minutes) - Use a pictogram and introduce the parts on a face step by step. + Face, hair, eye, nose, mouth, ear, lips, teeth (tooth) - Guide Ss to read the new words * Slap the board: - Write new words on over the board, ask 2 Ss to the front and ask them to stand at equal distance from the board. Call out one of new words in a loud voice. Two Ss run forward and slap the words on the board. The one who slaps the correct word is the winner. The winner stays standing, the loser sits down. Teacher calls Ss to replace the loser. Teacher give scores. - Guide Ss to play. - Introduce the new words and new target item. + Round, oval, full, thin, long, short (adj): (picture, explanation, antonym) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Call on Ss to read the new words loudly. - Introduce the structures: + She/ He has (a/ an) + Adjective + noun. - Make sure Ss to understand the new structures about form, meaning and use. - Play the tape B1 - Answer - Listen to - Guess the meaning of the words. - Repeat and read. - Read new words loudly.

- Work in pairs - Guess the meaning of the new words - Repeat the new words. - Read words aloud - Take notes - Pay attention. - Listen - Read loudly.

- Call on some Ss to read B1 loudly. - Correct their pronunciation Practice (20minutes) * Picture Drill: - Ask Ss to look at the picture then ask and answer the questions What is this/ that? And What are these/ those? - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. * Pictograph drill: - Draw some faces and ask Ss to describe using She/ he has in groups. He has a round face.

- Look at the picture - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly - Look at the pictographs and describe in groups.

- Go around and help if necessary. - Call on Ss to read and answer loudly. - Correct. Production(5 minutes) * Simon says: - Guide Ss to play. T: Simon says Touch your hair Ss: ( Touch their head) T: Touch your hair Ss: (Do nothing) Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 9 ( B2, B3, B4)

- Give answers

- Play as Teachers guide

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: January 14, 2012 Date of teaching: January 17, 2012 UNIT 9: THE BODY Lesson 4: B. FACES (B2, B3, B4) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Know some colors. - Describe features. - Develop reading skill then answer the questions. - Describe relatives. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Color, colour (adj): Black, yellow, white, green, gray, grey, blue, red, brown, orange, purple 2. Grammar: - Structures: She/ he has+ adjective + noun 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, slap the board, prediction, finding friends D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures:

1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (5 mins) Describe your friends Hes short and fat. He has a round face. He has short hair. He is strong, Warm-up(2 minutes) - Sing the song: - Introduce the new lesson ( describe face)

Students activities

- Sing - Listen to

Presentation(5 minutes) - Use a color pencil box and introduce new words. - Guess the meaning of the words. + color # colour (n): ( Situation) + black, white, gray, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, brown, - Repeat and read. purple, pink (a) - Read new words loudly. - Guide Ss to read the new words * Slap the board: - Write new words on over the board, ask 2 Ss to the front and ask them to stand at equal distance from the board. Call out one of new words in a loud voice. Two Ss run forward and slap the words on the board. The one who slaps the correct word is the winner. The winner stays standing, the loser sits down. Teacher calls Ss to replace the loser. Teacher give scores. - Guide Ss to play. - Introduce new target item. + meaning + Use: Ask and answer about the color + Form: What is + S ....... ? color are + S ...... ? + Intonation: Practice(8 minutes) * Picture Drill: - Ask Ss to look at the dolls then ask and answer about the colors in pairs. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Production (5 minutes) * Finding friends: - Ask Ss to work in groups and make sentences to describe one person. - Call one group to give sentences cues and other to guess NAME who described. - Give marks. Pre- reading (3 minutes) - Have Ss look at the picture about Miss Chi and brief describe about her. * Prediction: Miss chi is ------------_and thin. She has a --------------face, with---------------hair and ----------------eyes, a ---------------nose,------------lips and small teeth. - Ask Ss to guess and fill in the gaps. While- reading (7minutes) - Play the tape two times.

- Work in pairs - Pay attention.

- Look at the picture - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly

- Play as Teachers guide

- Listen.

- guess and fill in the gaps.

- Listen

- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud. - Correct the pronunciation. - Ask Ss to read the passage and check their prediction. * Questions and answers: - Ask Ss to read B4 and answer the questions. - Call on some Ss to give answers. - Correct * Answer key: a/ its long b/ its black c/ they are brown d/ its small e/they are full Post- reading (5 minutes) * Write- it- up: - Ask Ss to describe a friend in class using structures : she/ he has.. - Help Ss if necessary - Call on some Ss to describe loudly. - Correct. Consolidation(3 minutes) - Summarize the structures and new words. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Describe one of your relatives. - Prepare Unit 9 ( B5,B7)

- Read the passage loudly - Read and check. - Answer the questions in pairs - Give answers.

- Write to describe - Read answers loudly.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: January 15, 2012 Date of teaching: January 18, 2012 UNIT 9: THE BODY Lesson 5: B. FACES (B5, B7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Develop listening skill about describing face, hair. - Know the structures related to the unit. - Have good attitude in taking care of hair and face. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review) 2. Grammar: ( Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: prediction, pair work. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins)

Teachers activities Check up: (5 min) - Ask Ss to describe one of their relatives loudly. Warm-up (2 minutes) - Draw a picture and set the situation of the new lesson.

Students activities

- Answer

- Introduce the new lesson (listen and find the right people) Pre- listening (8 minutes) (B5) - Introduce the situation of the listen part. * Prediction: - Ask Ss to describe face, lips, hair of people in four pictures in B5. - Help if necessary. - Ask Ss to guess the order of the pictures in the tape. - Write Ss prediction on the board. - Ask Ss to prepare listening and choose the right answers. While- listening (12 minutes) - Play the tape two times. - Ask Ss to give their answers. - Play the tape again and correct the Ss answers. Answers key: 1. c 2.a 3. d 4. b Post- listening (5 minutes) - Guide Ss to sing the song in B6 - Call on Ss to sing in chorus then individuals. Activity (8 minutes) - Read and ask Ss to repeat. - Point one student and ask Ss to answer about the structures in B7 Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 10 (A1, A2, A3, A4)

- Listen to

- Listen - Describe. - Guess and arrange

-Listen and check their guessing. - Give answers. - Listen and check again. - Take notes. - Sing as teachers guide. - Sing loudly. - Repeat and read. - Answer - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: January 29, 2012 Date of teaching: January 31, 2012 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 1: A. HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A1, A2, A3, A4) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about the feelings. - Listen and know how some people feel. - Talk about wants and needs. - Know how to care others. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): noodles, drink, orange juice, (adj): hungry, thirsty, full, hot, cold, tired (v): feel, would like 2. Grammar: - Structures: + how do/ does + S+ feel? + What would you like? + Would you like..? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, questions and answers. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player,

E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2.New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss to sing the song: Head and shoulders Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss about feelings and lead the new lesson. - Introduce the new lesson ( talking feelings, wants, needs) Presentation (8 minutes) - Introduce the new words. + Feel (v): (translation) + hungry, thirsty, full, hot, cold, tired (a): ( pictures) + Would like (d like) : (v): ( translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Introduce new target item. + meaning + Use: How do you/ they feel? I/ They are/ feel hungry..... How does she/ he feel? He/ She feels/ is hungry... What would you/ they/ she/ he like?- Id/ shed/ hed theyd like a/ an/ some.... - Would you like.....? + Intonation: - Make sure Ss to understand the new items. - Play the tape of A1 and ask Ss to repeat. Practice (20 minutes) * Picture Drill: (A2/ P 105) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures then ask and answer about the feelings in pairs. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. * Questions and answers: ( A3, A4/ Page 105, 106) - Play the tape A3 - Ask Ss to repeat. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on two pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Correct the pronunciation. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions in A4 about Nam, Lan, and Ba. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions loudly. - Correct. Production (7 minutes) * Questions and answers: - Ask Ss to work in groups, Ask answer the questions. 1. How do you feel? 2. What would you like? 3. Would you like? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework( 1m ) - Learn new words and structures by heart.

Students activities - Answer - Listen to

- Guess the meaning of the words. - Repeat and read. - Read new words loudly. - Pay attention.

- Look at the picture - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly - Listen - Repeat - Work in pairs. - Show the dialogue loudly - Read and answer the questions - Ask and answer loudly.

- Work in pairs.

- Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

- Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 10 ( A5, A6, A8) F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: January 29, 2012 Date of teaching: February 1 , 2012 Period : 61 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 2: A. HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A5, A6, A8)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about the feelings. - Listen and know how some people feel and their needs. - Talk about wants and needs. - Know how to care others. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): matter (v): want 2. Grammar: - Structures: (review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, questions and answers. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss some questions: + Howfeel? + What would..like? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Mine and ask Ss to what it means. - Introduce the new lesson Activity (8 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A5 and answer the questions: 1. How does he/ she feel? 2. What would she/ he like? - Answer - Listen to - Look at the pictures and answer the questions.

- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and match the names with the - Listen and match right pictures. - Ask Ss to share the answers with a partner. - Work in pairs. - Call Ss to give answers. - Give answers - Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the answers. - Listen and check * Answer key: Phuong. B Nhan. A Ba. F Huong. D

Pre- listening (6 minutes) - Introduce new words - Guess the meaning + Matter (n): (Translation) + Want (v): ( Synonym) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Repeat and read * Prediction; Nhan: Whats the ____________? Dung: Im __________ Nhan: What do you _____________? Dung: I want a _________ ___________ - Ask Ss to guess and fill in the gaps. - Guess and fill in the gaps. - Write Ss prediction on the board. While- Listening (13 minutes) - Play the tape and ask Ss to check their prediction. - listen and check the answers. - Give answers. * Word cue drill: A6 a, b, c ( Page 107) - Pay attention - Guide Ss to understand and do exercise with a) as the same as dialogue in A6. - Work in pairs. - Ask Ss to work in pairs making the dialogues. - Go around and help if necessary. - Ask and answer loudly. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Post- Listening ( 8 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at A8 and listen Ts explanation. - Do as teachers guide. - Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the questions. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. 4. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 10 ( B1, B2, B3) F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: February 1, 2012 Date of teaching: February 3, 2012 Period : 62 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 3: B. FOOD AND DRINK (B1, B2, B3)

A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Name some kinds of food and drink. - Use words Some and any - Choose the right food and drink to eat and drink. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): apple, orange, banana, water, rice, milk, meat, vegetables, fruit, 2. Grammar: - Structures: Is there any? - Yes, there is some - No, there isnt any. Are there any? - Yes, there are some.. - No, there arent any.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, questions and answers.

D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss some questions: How do you feel?/ Whats the matter with you ? What do you want?/ What would you like? Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to name some kinds of food and drink. - Introduce the new lesson Presentation (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in B1 and introduce the new words: + Apple, orange, banana, water, rice, milk, meat, vegetables, fruit (n): ( picture) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Ask Ss What would you like? - Ask Ss to ask and answer in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer before class. - Introduce the dialogue of B2 about conversation between Thu and Phuong about lunch. Introduce the structures : Is there any? - Yes, there is some - No, there isnt any. Are there any? - Yes, there are some.. - No, there arent any - Make sure Ss to understand the new items. Practice (18 minutes) - Play the tape in B2 - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find the food and drink for lunch in the box. noodles banana meat milk rice water orange

Students activities

- Answer - Listen to - Look at the pictures guess the meaning of the words. - Listen and repeat. - Answer - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen. - Take notes.

- Listen and repeat - Read the dialogue in pairs - Read the dialogue loudly - Read and check

- Pay attention *Questions and answers: B3/ p/ 109 - Help Ss understand how to ask and answer about food and drink in B3 - Work in pairs ( using the box above) - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Check Ss work Production (7 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer about two structures above about items in the - Pay attention class. - Go around and help if necessary. - Work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 10 ( B4, B5, B6) F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: February 5, 2011 Date of teaching: February 7, 2011 Period : 63 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 4: B. FOOD AND DRINK (B4, B5, B6) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Name some kinds of food and drink. - Develop listening skill - Choose the right food and drink to eat and drink. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): menu, chicken, fish, bread 2. Grammar: - Structures: (Review) what s there to drink/ eat?- There is some. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, Matching, brainstorming D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities - Ask Ss some questions: - What would you like? - Is there any? - Are there any? Warm-up (5 minutes) * Brainstorming: Food meat Drink milk Check up: (3 mins) Students activities

- Work in groups. - Listen to

- Ask Ss to go to the board and write the items above. - Introduce the new lesson Pre- listening (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in B1 and introduce the new words: + menu, chicken, fish, bread (n):( picture) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Play the tape. - Ask Ss to ask and answer the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer before class. - Ask Ss to name the food and drink in B5. - Write on the board. - Ask Ss to prepare listening and match name with the pictures. While- listening (18 minutes) * Matching: - Play the tape two times - Ask Ss to give answers - play the tape again and check Ss answers. * Answers key:

- Look at the pictures guess the meaning of the words. - Listen and repeat. - Listen - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly. - Name

- Listen and match - Give answers - Listen and check

Nhan: c, f

tuan: a, d

huong: e, g

Mai: b, h

Post- listening (5 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer food and drink they like. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly.

- Pay attention - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly.

Consolidation (5 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Listen and remember. - Ask Ss to look at B6 and introduce what s there to drink/ eat?- - Practice as Ts guide There is some. Then help Ss ask and answer about the structures in B6 - Give the period of the lesson Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 10 (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5) F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: February 5, 2011 Date of teaching: February 8, 2011 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Lesson 5: MY FAVORITE FOOD (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Name some kinds of food and drink. - Use words LIKE - Talk about favorite food. - Choose the right food and drink to eat and drink. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): carrot, tomato, lettuce, potato, bean, coffee, onion, cabbage, lemonade, iced tea, iced coffee, soda. (a): favorite 9favourite (v): like 2. Grammar: - Structures: - Whats your favorite food? - I like fish/ I dont like carrot. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss some questions: How do you feel?/ Whats the matter with you ? What do you want?/ What would you like? - What would you like? Is there any? - Are there any? Period : 64

Warm-up (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to name some kinds of food and drink. - Introduce the new lesson Presentation (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in C1, C3 and introduce the new words: + Carrot, tomato, lettuce, potato, bean, coffee, onion, cabbage, lemonade, iced tea, iced coffee, soda. (n):( picture) + Favourite/ favorite (a): (Translation) + Like (v): (synonym) - Guide Ss to read the new words. * Picture drill: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. What are these/ those? What is this/ that? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer before class. - Introduce the dialogue of C2 about conversation between Nhan and Mai about their favorite food. Introduce the structures : + Whats your favorite food? +I like fish/ I dont like carrot. + Do you like..? - Make sure Ss to understand the new items. Practice (15 minutes) - Play the tape in C2 - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue loudly * Picture drill: C1, C33/ p/ 112 - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in C1, C3 and play role A: Whats your favorite food/ drink? B: I like ( fish/ soda) - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Check Ss work Production (11 minutes) - Guide the dialogue in C4 - Ask Ss to ask and answer in pairs about food and drink they like. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the lesson (C5) - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (3 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 11 ( A1)

- Answer - Listen to - Look at the pictures guess the meaning of the words.

- Listen and repeat. - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen. - Take notes.

- Listen and repeat - Read the dialogue in pairs - Read the dialogue loudly - Pay attention - Work in pairs - Pay attention - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: February 8, 2011 Date of teaching: February 10, 2011

UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Lesson 1: A. AT THE STORE(A1) + TEST 15 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Use quantifiers and containers to talk about things people buy at the store. - Help their mom go to the market to buy something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): cooking oil, tea, chocolate, beef, egg, soap, toothpaste, store keeper (quantifiers): a bottle of, a packet of, a box of, a kilo of, grams of, a dozen, a can of, a bar of, a tube of 2. Grammar: - Structures: - Can I help you? - Here you are. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, picture drill, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss some questions: What is your favorite food/ drink? Do you like..? Warm-up (5 minutes) * Chain- game: - Ask Ss to play game to talk about some kinds of food and drink in groups. Eg: Group 1: banana Group 2: banana, apple - Introduce the new lesson (Em bao gi i ch gip m cha?) Presentation (10 minutes) - Introduce the dialogue through the picture. - Introduce the new words: + Cooking oil, tea, chocolate, beef, egg, soap, toothpaste, store keeper (n):( picture) + a bottle of, a packet of, a box of, a kilo of, grams of, a dozen, a can of, a bar of, a tube of (quantifiers) ( Translation, picture) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Introduce the new structures: + Can I help you? + Here you are. * Rub out and remember dialogue: - Play the tape - Write whole the dialogue on the board - Get Ss to listen to the tape 3 times, each times T rubs out sentence in the dialogue. - Rub out whole the dialogue and ask Ss to read the dialogue rubbed out on the board. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue before class. Practice (15 minutes) * Picture drill: A1, b) C33/ p/ 115 - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A1 and play role A: can I help you? B: Yes, a packet of tea, please. A: Here you are - Play in groups - Listen to and answer

Period : 65

- Look at the pictures, listen and guess the meaning of the words.

- Listen and repeat. - Take notes.

- Listen and do as teachers guide.

- Look at the pictures and play role

A: Thank you - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Check Ss work Production (7 minutes) * Substitution drill: - Ask Ss to work in groups about food and drink they like. - Go around and help if necessary. Group 1: Rice Group 2: We/ I would like a kilo of rice Group 1: eggs Group2 : We/ I d like a dozen eggs. - Call on some Representative of each group to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 11 ( A2, A3)

- Work in pairs

- Work in groups - Pay attention

- Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

15 MINUTE TEST ( Fourth times) Nghe v khoanh trn vo mt p n ng trong mi cu sau: 1/ Lan is a ___________. ( teacher/ doctor/ singer/ actor) 2/ She has an _____________ face . ( round/ oval/ small/ long) 3/ She has ________________ black hair. ( long/ short/ gray/ violet) 4/ She has brown _______________. ( hair/ face/ eyes/ nose) 5/ She has a ___________nose and _____________lips. ( big-thin/ small- thin/ big- full/ small- full) Answer key: 1. Teacher 2. oval 3. long 4. eyes 5. small- full Tape transcript: Lan is a teacher. she has an oval face. she has a long black hair. she has brown eyes. she has a small nose. she has full lips.

Date of preparation: February 12, 2011 Date of teaching: February 14, 2011 Period : 66 UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Lesson 2: A. AT THE STORE (A2, A3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about quantities for shopping - develop listening skill, listen and match - Help their mom go to the market to buy something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): anything else, cookies, salesgirl (v): need 2. Grammar: - Structures: - How much..? / How many? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, bingo, pair work, prediction, questions and answers D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask two pairs to buy and sell something Warm-up(5 minutes) - Read the words in the table. Bingo: - Listen to the teacher. - Write 15 words related to food and drink on the board - Choose any five words. -Ask students to choose any five words and copy them - Put ticks next to the words that they listen to. into their books. - Shouts Bingo. - Let students listen to the teacher and correct. A2. Listen and repeat. Then answer.. (p 116) Presentation (10 minutes) - Introduce the dialogue through the picture. - Listen - Introduce the new words: - Guess the meaning of the words. + Salesgirl (n):( picture)

+ Anything else (n): ( Translation, picture) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Introduce the new structures: + Is there anything else? + How much + uncountable noun+ do you want? + How many + countable noun+ do you want? - Play the tape - Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue before class. Practice (6 minutes) Questions and answers: a)-d)/page 116 - Make sure Ss to understand the questions from a) to d) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Call on Ss to give answers Answers: a. Ba is in the store. b. He wants some beef and some egg. c. He wants two hundred grams of beef. d. He wants a dozen eggs. Production (6 minutes) Word cue drill: - Give example Beef/ 200 hundred grams. S1: How much beef do you want? S2: I want 200 hundred grams pf beef. 1) Orange/ a dozen oranges 2) chocolate/ a box of chocolate - Ask Ss to work in pairs ask and answer as example. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. A3. Listen. Match the names. (p 117) Pre- Listening: (2 minutes) - Elicit the new word cookies - Ask Ss to name the items of the pictures in A3 - Ask Ss to guess match names to the things they want - Write Ss prediction on the board. While- listening: (7 minutes) - Play the tape two times - Call on Ss to give answers to check their prediction. - Play the tape again and correct the answers with Ss Answers: Phuong d) Ly a) e) Mai b) Nam c) Post- Listening: (4 minutes) Survey: - Ask Ss to make a survey in groups, ask and answer the question What do you want? - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some Ss to report beginning with name in group wants. - Correct Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson.

- Listen and repeat. - Take notes.

- Listen and repeat - Work in pairs to read the dialogue - Read the dialogue loudly. - Pay attention - Read the dialogue and answer the questions in pairs. - Read the answers aloud.

- Pay attention

- Work in pairs - Pay attention - Ask and answer loudly. - Take notes - Name the things in A3 - Guess and match - Read their prediction aloud - Listen - Give answers - Correct with teacher

- Work in groups and answer the question - Report as teachers guide

- Listen and remember.

Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 11 ( A4 A5) F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: February 12 2011 Date of teaching: February 15, 2011 Period : 67 UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Lesson 3: A. AT THE STORE (A4, A5) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Read the dialogue talking about needs and wants - Develop reading skill - Help their mom go to the market to buy something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (pre): For (a): half 2. Grammar: - Structures: - How much..? / How many? (review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, jumbled words, questions and answers, word cue drill, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player,

E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss about some food and drink using How many/ much.? Warm-up(5 minutes) Jumbled words: - Write the words in not order of letters and ask Ss to arrange into meaning words. Ospa (soap) ceri (rice) aspe (peas) tecolacho (chocolate) betu (tube) -Ask students to give answers. A4. Read. Then write the shopping list..(p 117) Pre- reading (6 minutes) - Introduce the dialogue through the picture. - Introduce the new words: + For(pre):( Translation) + half (n): ( Translation, example) + Need (v): (Synonymn) - Guide Ss to read the new words. * Open- prediction: 4 things Nams mom wants him to buy at the store - Ask Ss to guess and give answers - Write the answers on the board

Students activities

- Arrange the words

- Give answers

- Listen - Guess the meaning of the words.

- Listen and repeat. - Take notes.

- Guess the answers and give

While- Reading ( 16 minutes) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and check their prediction - Ask Ss to share the answers with a partner - Call on Ss to give answers Answers: 1. cooking oil 2. rice 3. beef 4. orange Questions and answers: 1. How much cooking oil does she want? 2. How much rice does she want? 3. How much beef does she want? 4. How many oranges does she want? - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions. - Call on some Ss to give the answers Answers: 1. a bottle 2. two kilos 3. half a kilo 4. half a dozen Post- reading: (6 minutes) Word cue drill:

- Read the dialogue and check the answers - Work in pairs - Read the answers

- Read the dialogue and answer the questions - Read the answers aloud.

- Pay attention

- Give example Beef/ 200 hundred grams. S1: How much beef do you want? S2: I want 200 hundred grams pf beef. 1) Rice/ a kilo 2) beef/ 200 grams 3) eggs/ a dozen - Ask Ss to work in pairs ask and answer as example. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. A5. . Remember (p 118) (5 minutes) - Ask Ss to retell the content in A5 - Ask Ss to fill in the gaps. - Check Ss feedback Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 11 ( B1, B2, B3)

- Work in pairs - Pay attention - Ask and answer loudly. - Answer - Fill in the gaps - Give the answers - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: February 14, 2011 Date of teaching: February 14, 2011 Period : 68 UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Lesson 4: B. AT THE CANTEEN (B1, B2, B3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about the price of food and drink. - further practice in offers and requests for food and drinks. - go to the market to buy something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): thousand, (quan): a glass of, a bowl of 2. Grammar: - Structures: - How much..? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, slap the board, questions and answers, word cue drill, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss about some food and drink using What do you like? - Play as teachers guide Warm-up(5 minutes) * Slap the board: - Guide Ss to play with words related to food and drinks.

Presentation: (10 minutes) B1. Do you remember these?..............p 119 B2. Listen and repeatp. 120 - Ask Ss to name food and drinks in pictures in B1. - Write on the board. a. rice b. a bowl of noodles c. beef d. chicken e. fish f. vegetables g. orange h. banana i. orange juice j. milk k. soda l. water - Introduce the new words and new item: + a glass of (quant): (picture) + How much? - Guide Ss to read the new words and understand new item - Introduce the situation of B2. - Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue aloud. - Correct the pronunciation. Practice ( 15 minutes) B3. Ask and answer p. 120 - Give questions and guide to answer. + What would you like for breakfast? lunch? dinner? Id like . . . * Word cue drill - bread / milk - noodle / water - rice / orange juice - fish / soda - chicken / iced tea - beef / vegetables / lemonade Example exchanges: S1: What would you like for breakfast? S2: Id like some [beef] and some [milk] S1: : What would you like for lunch? S2: Id like some [fish] and a[soda] - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Call on Ss to give answers Production: (8 minutes) * Games: - Ask Ss to go to the store to buy something. S1: How much is a bowl of noodles? S2: it is 10.000 dong. - Ask Ss to work in pairs ask and answer as example. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 11 ( B4, B5, B6)

- Look at the pictures and name - Take notes

- Listen and take notes -Listen and repeat -Listen - Listen and repeat - Work in pairs - Read the dialogue in pairs loudly - Take notes. - Listen and pay attention

- Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly. - Pay attention - Work in pairs - Pay attention - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: February 19, 2011 Date of teaching: February 21, 2011 Period : 69 UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Lesson 5: B. AT THE CANTEEN (B4, B5, B6 ) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Develop reading skill - Talk about the price of food and drink. - Go to the market to buy something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): sandwich, lemon juice, fried rice, cake, ice cream (quan): a glass of, a bowl of 2. Grammar: - Structures: - How much..? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, bingo, questions and answers, Picture drill, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) - Ask Ss What would you like for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner? - Play as teachers guide Warm-up(5 minutes) * Bingo: - Choose 9 words in B1 and guide Ss to play with words related to food and drinks. Activity1: (10 minutes)/ B4. Listen..............p 120 - Ask Ss to name food and drinks in pictures in B1. - Look at the pictures and name - Write on the board. - Take notes a. rice b. a bowl of noodles c. beef d. chicken e. fish f. vegetables g. orange h. banana i. orange juice j. milk k. soda l. water * Matching (B4 P.120 ) - Ask Ss to listen and number the pictures in B1 - Play the tape two times - Prepare listening - Call on Ss to give answers -Listen and number the pictures - Play the tape again and check with Ss - Give answers Answer key:. - Listen again and check with Ss a b c d e f g h i j k l 2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8 Activity 2: ( 15 minutes) B5. Listen and read/ p. 120 - Introduce the new words: + Sandwich, lemon juice, fried rice, cake, ice cream (n):Explanation) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Play the tape B5 and ask Ss to listen and repeat. - Guide Ss to ask and answer about the price. * Picture drill (B5-6/P.121)

- Listen and guess the meaning of the words. - Listen and repeat - Listen and repeat - Pay attention

Ex: S1: How much is a fried rice ? S2: Its two thousand five hundred dong - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Call on Ss to give answers Activity 3: (8 minutes) B6. Remember/ P 121 - Ask Ss to ask and answer about the items in the class. - Help if necessary Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Grammar practice

- Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly. - Ask and answer about the items in the class. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: February 20, 2011 Date of teaching: February 22, 2011 Period : 70 GRAMMAR PRACTICE A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Practice using present simple, present progressive tenses, A, AN, SOME, ANY, adjectives, question words. - Have good ways in consolidating. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (review) 2. Grammar:- The present simple tense - The present progressive tense - A, AN, SOME, ANY - Question words - Adjectives 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Gap- fill, pair work D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson: (44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) Questions: - How do you feel? - What would you like? - Do you like fish?...... Warm-up (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to say what they learned in previous units. - Introduce the new lesson. - Answer - Listen to

Activity 1 (11 minutes) * Gap- fill: ( 1/5 Present simple tense, present progressive tense) (Page 122, 123) - Elicit the formation, use, and clues of the present simple tense, and present progressive tense - Ask Ss to use right form of verbs in the brackets then ask and answer in pairs in 1and individuals in 5. - Call on 2 pairs to ask and answer in 1 loudly then give the answers in 5 - Correct. Answer key: 1/ a. like , like ; Dolike , I dont like b. does like , likes ; Does like , doesnt like 5/ a. is eating b. are drinking c. is riding d. is going e. is getting f. is traveling Activity 2 ( 7 minutes) * Picture drill: ( 2./A, AN, SOME, ANY: Page 122) - Revise how to use the A, AN, SOME, ANY - Ask Ss to read sentences in 2/ then find the suitable words to fill in the gaps. - Ask Ss to work in groups. - Call on some Ss to give answer. - Correct Answer key: a. any , any , some , an b. any , some c. any , some , a Activity 3 ( 7 minutes) * Gap- fill: ( 3/ Adjectives/ Page 122) - Ask Ss to read sentences, pay attention to adjectives and their antonym. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some to read answers loudly. - Correct Answer key: a. short b. thin c. light d. strong e. full f. cold g. thin h. long Activity 4 ( 7 minutes) * Gap- fill: ( 4/ Question words/ Page 123) - Ask Ss to look at the picture and to find the question words for gaps. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Answer key: a. Who b. What c. How d. What e. Where Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare for the test

- Pay attention - Work in pairs and individuals. - Give answers

- Pay attention

- Work in groups - Give answers loudly.

- Pay attention - Read and give answers - answer loudly - Take notes

- Pay attention - Work in pairs - Give answers

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

15 MINUTE TEST ( Fourth times) Nghe v khoanh trn vo mt p n ng trong mi cu sau: 1/ Lan is a ___________. ( teacher/ doctor/ singer/ actor) 2/ She has an _____________ face . ( round/ oval/ small/ long) 3/ She has ________________ black hair. ( long/ short/ gray/ violet) 4/ She has brown _______________. ( hair/ face/ eyes/ nose) 5/ She has a ___________nose and _____________lips. ( big-thin/ small- thin/ big- full/ small- full) Answer key: 1. Teacher 2. oval 3. long 4. eyes 5. small- full Tape transcript: Lan is a teacher. she has an oval face. she has a long black hair. she has brown eyes. she has a small nose. she has full lips. ONE PERIOD TEST (The third time) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Use old knowledge to do the test - Self evaluate their studying. After the lesson, teacher can change the method to help Ss learn better. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (review) 2. Grammar: (review) 3. Language skills: reading, writing, language focus C/ Techniques: observation D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers E/ Content of the test: I/ Khoanh trn vo mt t ng nht trong mi cu. (4 im) 1. I dont have _________oranges,but Ihave _________apples. A. any/some B any/any C. some/any D. some/some 2. What___________is your hair?. A.color B. food C. number D. book 3. _____________beef do you want? A kilo. A How many B. How much C. How D. What 4. He isnt tall. He is ___________________. A.hot B. thin C. short D. fat 5. Lam____________short hair. A. is B. are C. have D. has 6. How much is a__________of toothpaste? Its 17,000dong. A. bar B. tube C. can D. box 7. Would you like some tea?.-___________. A. Yes,I am B. No,I wouldnt C.No,I dont D. No.Thanks 8. Hes very hungry. He wants some ______________. A. iced tea B. noodles C. coffee D. lemon juice II/Dng Some, A, An hay Any in vo ch trng(1im) . 1. Id like _________dozen eggs. 2.There arent__________books on the table. III/ Lm theo yu cu trong ngoc. (1.5 im) 1. Lan feels cold. (t cu hi cho cu tr li ). ................................................................................................................................ 2. My mother/ need/ half a kilo/beef.( Dng nhng t cho vit li cu hon chnh) ................................................................................................................................ 3. Is/ what/ favorite/ food/ your ? (hy sp xp nhng t cho thnh cu c ngha) IV/ c on hi thoi v tr li cu hi. (2.5 im) Storekeeper : Can I help you?

Lan : Yes.Id like two kilos of beef and 6 oranges , please. Storekeeper : Here you are. Lan : Thanks. How much are they? Storekeeper : 70 thousand dong...........Thank you. 5. Where is Lan? ..................................................................... 6. What would she like? ............................ 7. How much beef does she want? 8. How many oranges does she want? 9. How much are they? .............................................. V. Tr li cu hi v bn thn em.( 1im) 1. How do you feel?........................................................................................................................... 2. What would you like for breakfast?............................................................................................... P N V HNG DN CHM I/ 4 IM 1. A 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. D II/ 1 IM 1. A 2. Any III/ 1.5 IM 1. How does she feel? 2. My mother needs half a kilo of beef. 3. What is your favorite food? IV/ 2.5 IM 1. He is at the store. 2. Hed like beef and oranges. 3. He wants two kilos of beef. 4. He wants five oranges. 5. They are 70 thousand dong. V/ 1 IM 1. Cu tr li ca hc sinh. 2. Cu tr li ca hc sinh. 6. B 7.D 8. B

MA TRN Bi lm s 3 Ting Anh 6 NHN BIT TN READING WRITING LANGUAGE FOCUS TNG 10 5.0 10 5.0 5 2.5 5 2.5 20 10 TL TN THNG HIU TL 5 2.5 5 2.5 10 5.0 5 2.5 TN VN DNG TL 5 2.5

CH

TNG

Date of preparation: February 22, 2011 Date of teaching: February 24, 2011 Period :72 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Lesson 1: A. WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - further practice in present progressive and sports vocabulary to talk about what people are doing now. - Choose the right kind of sports to play. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): badminton, aerobics, tennis, table tennis (v): swim, skip, jog

2. Grammar: - Structures: - What are you doing?/ What is she/ he doing? - Which sports do you play?/ Which sports does she/ he play? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, Brainstorming, questions and answers, picture drill, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. Check up: (No) 3. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Warm-up(5 minutes) Brainstorming: sports Playing volleyball Playing soccer - Write the topic on the board and ask Ss to write what they know on it. Presentation: (15 minutes) A1. Listen and Read. ..(p 124) - Introduce the activities in the picture. - Introduce the new words: + Badminton, aerobics, tennis, table tennis (n): (Picture) + Swim, skip, jog (v): (mime) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Read A1 and ask Ss to repeat. - Ask Ss to revise the formation of present progressive tense. A2. Ask and answer. /P125 - Guide Ss to answer the questions in A2 * Picture drill: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer based on the pictures - Call on some Ss to ask and answer loudly. A3. Listen and repeat../ P 125 - Introduce the structure: Which sports do you play? - Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud. Practice. (10 minutes) A4. Read. Then answer the questions. /P126 - Ask Ss to read the passages - Make sure Ss to understand the questions - Ask Ss to answer the questions - Ask Ss to share the answers with a partner - Call on Ss to give answers Answers: a. Lan swims, does aerobics and plays badminton b. No, she doesnt c. He plays soccer, jogs and plays table tennis d. Yes, he does. Production: (6 minutes) A5. Write. /p 126 Role play and write it- up: - Go to the board and write down.

- Listen - Guess the meaning of the words. - Listen and repeat. - Take notes. - Pay attention - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - pay attention and take notes - Listen and repeat - Ask and answer loudly.

- Read the passages - Pay attention - Answer the questions - Share the answers with a partner - Read the answers

- Ask Ss to ask and answer Which sports do you play? in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Ask Ss to write the answers into notebooks. A6. Remember (p 126) (5 minutes) - Ask Ss to retell the content in A6 - Ask Ss to ask and answer aloud. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 12 ( B1, B2, B3)

- Ask and answer loudly. - write down - Answer - Give the answers - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: February26, 2011 Date of teaching: February 28, 2011 Period :73 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Lesson 2: B. FREE TIME (B1, B, B3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Describe activities in the free time - Talk about frequency of activities. - Choose the suitable activities for their pastimes. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): free time (exp): go to the movies, go fishing 2. Grammar: - Structures: - What do you do in your free time? - What does she/ he do in her/ his free time? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (5) - Ask Ss to answer the questions: Which sports do you play?/ Which sports does she/ he play? Warm-up(5 minutes) Matching : Listen Go television a book - Match

Students activities

Watch Play Go Read

fishing to the movies to music video game

- Listen

- Ask Ss to match - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation: (8 minutes) B1. Listen and repeat. ..(p 127) - Introduce the activities in the picture. - Introduce the new words: + go to the movies, go fishing, free time (explanation, translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - Play the tape two times - Introduce What do you do in your free time? What does she/ he do in her/ his free time? - Call on some Ss to read content of B1 loudly. Practice. (15 minutes) B2. Practice with a partner. Ask and answer the. /P127 - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer the question: What do you do in your free time? - Call on some pairs to ask answer loudly * Words cue drill: - Play the tape B3 - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer the question: What doesdo his /her free time? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Production: (7 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer What do you do in your free time? What does she/ he do in her/ his free time? in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 12 ( B4, B5, B6)

- Listen - Guess the meaning of the words. - Listen and repeat. - Take notes. - Read B1 loudly

- Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen - Work in pairs - Ask and answer aloud - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly. - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: February 26, 2011 Date of teaching: February 29, 2011 Period : 74 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Lesson 3: B. FREE TIME (B4, B5, B6) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Listen and identify the activities in free time. - Use the Question How often and answers once, twice. - Choose the suitable activities for their pastimes.

B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): How often, once, twice, three times.. a week. 2. Grammar: - Structures: - How often.? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, picture drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (5) - Ask Ss to answer the questions: What do you do in your free time? What does she/ he do in her/ his free time? Warm-up(5 minutes) Network Watch TV free time activities read - Ask Ss to write the - Introduce the new lesson. B4. Listen. ( Page 128) (8 minutes) - Ask Ss to name activities in each picture in B4 - Ask Ss to listen and match names with the right pictures. - Play the tape two times - Call on Ss to give answers - Play the tape again and check the answers Answer key: - Tan -f - Minh and Nam -e - Lien -a - Lan and Mai -b B5. Listen and Read. How often?( page 128/ 129) Presentation. (5 minutes) - Introduce the structure: How does she/ he/ it read? often do you listen to music? they play badminton? Once a week Twice month Three year times - Make sure Ss to understand the target of language - Play the tape the tape two times Practice. (15 minutes) Picture drill: - Ask Ss to name the activities in the pictures on page 129 - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer the question: How often does Ly ?- She a week - Call on some pairs to ask answer loudly Students activities

- Write on the board - Listen

- Name the pictures - Listen and match - Give answers - Listen and check again

- Pay attention

- Listen - Name the activities - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly.

Production: (7 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer How often do you..? - I . ..a week. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (2 minutes) B6. Remember. (page 129) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 12 ( C1, C2, C3, C4)

- Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: February 29, 2011 Date of teaching: March 2, 2011 Period : 75 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Lesson 4: C. HOW OFTEN? (C1, C2, C3, C4) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - understand and use the adverb of frequency - Use the Question How often and answers with adverb of frequency - know how to arrange the activities in suitable ways. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): Zoo, tent (adv): always, usually, often, sometimes, never (exp): fly the kite, go camping 2. Grammar: Structures: - How often.? - Adverb of frequency 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, Chatting D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (5) - Ask Ss to answer the questions: How often.? Warm-up(5 minutes) Chatting: - Ask Ss to answer the questions: 1. Do you go to the park? 2. Do you play sports? Students activities

- Answer

- Introduce the new lesson.

- Listen

Presentation: (12 Minutes) C1. Listen and repeat. ( Page 130) - Introduce adverb of frequency: + always, usually, often, sometimes, never (explanation) - Guide Ss to read the words above - Call on Ss to read the words aloud C2. Listen and read. (page 130/ 131) - Ask Ss to guess the activities in the pictures. - Elicit the new words: + Zoo, tent (n): (pictures) + fly the kite, go camping (exp): (pictures- Explanation) + Because (adv): ( Translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Play the tape two times - Help Ss understand how to ask the question : How often? And answers with adverb of frequency. Practice. (10 minutes) C3. Ask and answer. (Page 131) Questions and answers: 1. How often do Ba and LAn play sports? 2. How often do they go to the park? 3. How often do they go camping? 4. How often do they walk to school? 5. How often do they do their homework? - Ask Ss to read C2 and answer the questions in pairs. - Call on some pair to ask and answer aloud Production: (9 minutes) C4. Write sentences about you in your.(page 131) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in C4 - Go around and help if necessary - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Call on some Ss to write answers on the board. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 12 ( C5, C6, C7) F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: March 2, 2011 Date of teaching: March 6, 2011 Period : 76

- Listen and take notes - listen and repeat - Read words aloud - Guess and tell -Guess the meaning of the words

- Listen and repeat - Listen - Pay attention and take notes

- Read C2 and answer the questions in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Work in pairs - Ask and answer aloud - Write on the board - Listen and remember.

UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Lesson 5: C. HOW OFTEN? (C5, C6, C7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Develop listening skill about adverb of frequency - Read a short text to understand details - Know how to arrange the activities in suitable ways. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): weekend, boots, camping stove (adv): overnight (v): wear, take, camp (a): strong 2. Grammar: Structures: - How often.? (review) - Like + V_ing 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, Chatting, prediction D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5) - Ask Ss to answer the questions in C4 - Look at the pictures and guess Warm-up(3 minutes) Chatting: - Listen - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in C5 and guess activities Nga and Lan do. - Introduce the new lesson. C5. LISTEN (PAGE 132) Pre- Listening: (5 minutes) * Prediction: - Ask Ss to name activities in pictures in C5 - Name the meaning - Ask Ss to guess and match the adverb of frequency with pictures - Guess and match - Write the prediction on the board - Read their prediction loudly While- listening: (6 minutes) - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to check their prediction. - Listen and check their answers - Call on Ss to give answers - Give answers - Play the tape again and check Ss answers - Listen and check answers Answer key: a. never b. sometimes c. often d. often e. usually Post- listening: (4 minutes) - Ask Ss to use the answers in C5, asking and answering the - Use the answers and ask and questions How often..? answer in pairs Eg: How often do Nga and Lango camping? - They nevergo camping - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud - - Ask and answer loudly C6. then answer the questions (page 132, 133) Pre- reading: (5 minutes) - Introduce the new words - Guess the meaning + weekend, boots, camping stove (n) ( Translation, picture, translation)

+ overnight (adv): (Translation) + wear, take, camp (v): (Translation) + strong (a): (translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words. - make sure Ss to understand the meaning of the questions in C6 While- Reading: (10 minutes) - Get students to work in pairs to answer the questions on page 133. - Call on Ss to give answers Answer key: a. He likes walking. b. They always wear strong boots and warm clothes. c. He goes on the weekend. d. He usually goes with two friends. e. He often goes walking in the mountain. f. They take food, water and a camping stove. Post- Reading: (3 minutes) * Transformation writing: - Ask Ss to rewrite the passage in C6 from Minh into I - Call on two Ss to read the passage aloud - Correct the pronunciation and grammar Consolidation (2 minutes) C7. remember. (page 133) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Find the mistakes in your test

- Repeat and read - Pay attention and take note - Read the texts and give answers - Read the answers

- Read and rewrite - Read aloud - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: March 5, 2011 Date of teaching: March 7, 2011

Period : 77 TEST CORRECTION + TEST 15 Period 43; CORECTION THE TEST + Test 15 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn from the errors in the tests. - Control better method of learning for next lessons. Teacher can evaluate students knowledge and change suitable method in next teaching lessons. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review): 2. Grammar: ( Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chain- game, picture cue drill, pair- work, gap-fill D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers

E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) 3. Key I. Chn t thch hp in vo ch trng : 1/b 2/ a 3/ c 4.c 5/ a 6/ b 7/ c II. Hon thnh on hi thoi cho sn: 1/ What time 2/ Which III.Tm li sai : 1/A 2/ A 3/ C IV., c on vn v tr li cu hi 1. His name is Minh.. 2. No, he doesnt. 3. His school is in the city. 4. There are 900 students. V. Vit cu da vao cc t gi 1. Ba watches TV after school. 2. There are mountains behind the tall trees. 4. Results Lp Bi HS lm/ s HS 6A3 36 6A4 40 All 76 >= 8 0 3 3 >= 5 8 7 15

8/c 3/How many 4/ D 4/When

< 5 10 14 24

< 3.5 17 2 19

4. Homework (1 minute) Prepare unit 8: A1, A2, A3. F/ Self- Evaluation: .. TEST 15 I/ Cho dng ng ca ng t 1. We (watch)____________ television every morning. 2. The boys ( go)________________to the zoo now. 3. Nam often ( go)____________________to the movies on Sundays. 4. Which sports your children ( play)______________________? II/ Chn t ng in vo ch trng 1. They are _______________badminton. (do, doing, playing, going) 2. _______________sport does he play? ( what,Who, Where, Which) 3. What does he do _______________his free time? (for, in, at, on) 4. I go_______________ ( soccer, tennis, fishing, volleyball) KEY I/ 1. watch 2. are going 3. goes 4. play II/ 1.playing 2. Which 3. in 4 . fishing

Date of preparation: March 7, 2011

Date of teaching:

March 9, 2011

Period : 78 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Lesson 1: A. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A1, A2) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Ask and answer about the weather of seasons. - Use the Question How often and answers with adverb of frequency - Know the temperature and weather in their life. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): weather, season, summer, winter, fall, spring, dry- season, rainy- season (a): Hot, warm, cold, cool, dry, wet 2. Grammar: Structures: What s the weather like?- Its 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, Hang- man D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min). 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (No) Warm-up(5 minutes) Hang- man: - Play as teachers guide - Guide Ss to play the game with words sports and pastimes - Listen - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation: (12 Minutes) A1. Listen and repeat. ( Page 134) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and describe them - Look and describe - Elicit the new words: - Guess the meaning of the words + weather, season, summer, winter, fall, spring, dry- season, rainyseason (n): ( Pictures, diagrams) + hot, warm, cold, cool, dry, wet (a): ( mine, pictures) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Listen and repeat - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to repeat - Help Ss the question: What the weather like in the..? - Pay attention and take notes - Its . Practice. (15 minutes) A2. practice with a partner. (Page 135) Picture drill: - Work in pairs - Ask Ss to ask and answer the question in A2 - Ask and answer loudly - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud Production: (9 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions - Work in pairs 1. Whats the weather like in dry season? 2. What s the weather like in rainy season? - Ask and answer aloud - Go around and help if necessary - Write on the board - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Call on some Ss to write answers on the board. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook

- Prepare Unit 13 ( A3) F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: March 11, 2011 Date of teaching: March 13, 2011 Period : 79 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Lesson 2: A. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about the weather they like. - Talk about the weather other people around like. - Know how to keep the body healthy B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): hot weather, cold weather, warm weather, cool weather 2. Grammar: Structures: What weather like? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, matching D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 38 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (5 mins) Ask Ss What s the weather in the ..? Warm-up(5 minutes) Matching: Seasons Weather Spring Hot Fall Cold Summer Warm Winter Cool - Read and match Dry season Wet - Listen Rainy season dry - Hang the flash cards and ask Ss to match the seasons to weather - Introduce the new lesson. A3. Listen and repeat. ( Page 135) Presentation: (6 Minutes) - Elicit the new words: - Guess the meaning of the words + hot weather, cold weather, warm weather, cool weather (n): ( Pictures, diagrams) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to repeat - Listen and repeat - Help Ss the question: + What weather do you like? _+ I like hot weather. - Pay attention and take notes + What weather does she like? + She likes cool weather. Practice. (19 minutes) Picture drill: - Work in pairs

- Ask Ss to ask and answer the question in A3 - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud Production: (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the question What weather does.like? - Go around and help if necessary - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Call on some Ss to write answers on the board. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 13 ( A4, A5)

- Ask and answer loudly - Work in pairs - Ask and answer aloud - Write on the board

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: March 11, 2011 Date of teaching: March 13, 2011 Period : 80 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Lesson 3: A. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A4, A5 ) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about activities they do in different weather. - Develop reading skill about Bas activities. - Know how to choose the suitable activities in different kinds of weather. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Adv): When 2. Grammar: What do you do when its.? What does Ba do when its..? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, hang- man D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Ask Ss What weather do you like? Warm-up(5 minutes) * Hang- man: - Play as teachers guide - Guide Ss to play the game with words hot weather - Listen - Introduce the new lesson. A4. Read ( Page 136, 137) Pre- reading: (6 Minutes) - Help Ss the question: + What does Ba do when its? - Pay attention and take notes - Ask Ss to guess and answer the questions What does Ba do when - Predict and answer the questions its hot/ cold/ warm/ cool? ( The pictures as cues) While- reading. (15 minutes)

- Ask Ss to read A4 and check their prediction. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud Post- reading: (15 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions What do you do when its hot/ cold/ cool/ warm/ dry/ wet? - Go around and help if necessary - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Call on some Ss to write answers on the board. Consolidation (4 minutes) A5. Remember. (Page 137) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs loudly - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 13 ( B1)

- Listen and repeat - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Write on the board

- Ask and answer aloud - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: March 14, 2011 Date of teaching: March 16, 2011 Period : 81 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Lesson 4: B. ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B1) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Listen and speak about activities in seasons using adverbs of frequency. - Know sport vocabulary. - Know how to choose the suitable activities in different kinds of weather. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (v): going sailing (n): basketball 2. Grammar: - Adverbs of frequency 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, chatting D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (3 mins) Ask Ss What do you do when its hot/ cold/ cool/ warm/ dry/ wet? Warm-up(5 minutes) * Chatting: - Ask Ss to answer the questions What do you do in the summer/ witer/ fall/ spring? - Introduce the new lesson.

Students activities

- Play as teachers guide - Listen

B1. Listen and repeat ( Page 138, 139) Pre- listening: (8 Minutes) - Ask Ss to name seasons - Ask Ss to name the sports they have learned - Introduce new words: + Go sailing (v) : ( Picture) + Basketball (n): ( Picture) - Ask Ss to list the adverbs of frequency. - Help Ss the questions: + What do you do in the + seasons? + I + frequency+ V.. - Hang some pictures in B1 and ask Ss to say the meaning of them While- listening. (15 minutes) - Play the tape two times - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions 1. What do they do in the fall? 2. What does she/ he do in the fall/ winter? 3. What do you do in the spring/ winter? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud Post- listeningg: (15 minutes) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions What do you do in the fall/ spring/ summer/ winter/ raining season/ dry season? - Go around and help if necessary - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Call on some Ss to write answers on the board. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 13 ( B2, B3)

- Name the seasons - Name - List the adverbs of frequency - Say the meaning of the pictures - Listen and repeat - Work in pairs

- Ask and answer loudly - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Write on the board

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: March 18, 2011 Date of teaching: March 20, 2011 Period : 82 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Lesson 5: B. ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B2, B3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Write activities they do in different seasons - Know sport vocabulary. - Choose the suitable activities in each season. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (review) 2. Grammar: (review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, chatting D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player,

E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (3 mins) Ask Ss What do you do in the + seasons? Warm-up(5 minutes) * Networks: seasons

Students activities

fall

Play soccer

summer - Ask Ss to work in 2 groups and write on the board - Introduce the new lesson. B2. Write lists of things you ( Page 139) Pre- Writing: (8 Minutes) - Guide Ss to understand the example in text book - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions What do you do in the + seasons? While- writing. (15 minutes) - Ask Ss to write a passage beginning with in the + season, i - Go around and help if necessary Post- Writing: (15 minutes) - Ask Ss to read their writing aloud - Correct B3. Remember (Page 139) Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 14 ( A1, A2, A3) - Do in 2 groups - Listen - Name the seasons - Name - Write by themselves - Read their writing aloud

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: March19, 2011 Date of teaching: March 21, 2011 Period : 83 UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Lesson 1: A. VACATION DESTINATIONS (A1, A2, A3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about the vacation

- Ask and answer the plans of vacation - Know some places for vacation B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): summer vacation, holiday, citadel, bay, beach, uncle, aunt, destination (v): visit, stay (pre): for 2. Grammar: Near future: be going to 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, word cue drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min)

2. New lesson:( 44mins) Teachers activities Check up: (5 mins) Ask Ss What do you do in the summer/ winter/ fall/ spring/ rainy season/ dry season? Warm-up(3 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the text and guess where they are, and ask Ss if they visit the places above. - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation: (10 Minutes) A1. Listen and repeat. ( Page 140)

Students activities - Answer - Listen

- Listen - Introduce content of the dialogue in A1 - Guess the meaning of the words - Elicit the new words: + summer vacation, holiday, citadel, bay, beach, uncle, aunt, destination (n): (Explanation, synonym, example, picture, translation) + visit, stay(v): ( Translation) + for (pre): (Translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Listen and repeat - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to repeat

- Present : Near future: Be going to + V( Bare infinitive), express the intention for future - Elicit the question: How long.?- For + a period of time Practice. (17 minutes) - Ask Ss to work impairs to read the dialogue in A1 - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue loudly. * Questions and answers: ( A2. answer./ page 141) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the question in A2 - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud Answer key: a, She is going to visit Hue. b, She is going to stay in a hotel. c, She is going to stay in Hue for a week. d, She is going to visit the citadel. * Word cue drill: (A3 Write./ page 141) - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask answer the questions in A3 - Call on some pairs to show their work aloud - Ask Ss to write the answers into exercise books. Production: (6 minutes) - Ask Ss to work in groups to ask and answer the questions: 1. What are you going to do this summer vacation? 2. Where are you going to stay? 3. How long are you going to stay? 4. What are you going to do? - Go around and help if necessary - Call on some Ss from each group to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 14 ( A4, A5, A6) F/ Self- Evaluation:

- Listen and repeat - Pay attention and take notes - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Work in pairs - Ask and answer aloud - Write on the board

- Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Work in groups

- Show their work - Listen and remember.

Date of preparation: March 21, 2012 Date of teaching: March 23, 2012 Period : 84 UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Lesson 2: A. VACATION DESTINATIONS (A4, A5, 6 ) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Develop reading skill about plans of Phuong and Mai - Ask and answer about their vacation and others - Practice be going to and sequencing words. - Plan to do something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): grandmother, grandfather (v): see, go on (pre): for 2. Grammar: Near future: be going to - Sequencing words: first, next 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing

C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, word cue drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Ask Ss 1. What are you going to do this summer vacation? 2. Where are you going to stay?m 3. How long are you going to stay? 4. What are you going to do? Warm-up(5 minutes) * Matching A B - Match Ben Thanh Market Nha Trang - Listen The beach HCM city The citadel Ha Noi Ngoc Son temple Quang Ninh Ha Long bay Hue - Ask Ss to match - Introduce the new lesson. Pre- reading: (6 Minutes) A4. Listen and Read ( Page 142, 143) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A4 and guess where they are - Look and guess - Introduce the new words: - Guess the meaning + See (v): ( explanation) + Go on (v): ( Translation) + Grand mother, grandfather (n): ( explanation) - Elicit the sequencing words: first, next, then , after that, finally - Listen and repeat - Guide Ss to read the new words - Listen - Play the tape two times. While- reading. (15 minutes) * Grid: (A5.Practive/ page 143) - Work in groups - Ask Ss to read A4 and fill the table in groups - Give answers - Call on some Ss to give answers place to where to stay How What to do visit long First Ha Long with uncle, 2 days see Ha Long bay bay aunt Then Ha Noi hotel 3days see Ngoc Son temple Next hue with friends 2days see citadel After Nha friends house 3 days go to Nha trang that Trang beach Finally CHM grandparents a week visit grandparents City house Post- reading: (15 minutes) - Work in pairs - Ask Ss to look at the table then ask and answer the questions 1. Which place are they going to visit.? 2. Where are they going to stay? 3. How long are they going to stay? 4. What are they going to do? - Go around and help if necessary - Ask and answer loudly - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (4 minutes) A6. Remember. (Page143 ) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs loudly - Ask and answer aloud

- Summarize the lesson What, Where, How long - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 14 ( B1, B2, B3)

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation:

Date of preparation: March 25, 2012 Date of teaching: March 27, 2012 Period :85 UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Lesson 3: B. FREE TIME PLANS (B1. B2, B3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Talk about free time plans. - Ask and answer about others plan in free time. - Plan to do something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): tomorrow, tonight, match, Jurassic park (exp): what about you?, I dont know 2. Grammar: Near future: be going to 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, word cue drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Ask Ss 1. What are you going to do this summer vacation? 2. Where are you going to stay? 3. How long are you going to stay? 4. What are you going to do? Warm-up(3 minutes) - Ask Ss to say activities in free time - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation: (10 Minutes) B1. Listen and repeat. ( Page 144) - Answer - Listen

- Introduce the topic Free time plan - Elicit the new words: + tomorrow, tonight, match, Jurassic park (n): (Explanation, translation) + what about you?, I dont know (exp): ( Translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Ask Ss to guess the plan for activities of Tuan and Lan in their free time - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to repeat - Revise: Near future: Be going to + V( Bare infinitive - Elicit the question: What are you going to do tonight/ tomorrow? And how to answer them. - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs - Call on two pairs to read the dialogue aloud. - Correct their pronunciation Practice. (10 minutes) ( B2. prepare two dialogue.../ page 144) Word cue drill - Help Ss to make the dialogue Eg: Tonight: see a movie Tomorrow: go walking S1: What are you going to do tonight? S2: I am going to see a movie. What about you? S1: I am going to go walking. - Ask Ss to make the dialogue using the words provided in pairs - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud - Ask Ss to write the dialogues into exercise books Production: (15 minutes) B3. Listen and read. Then .( Page 144) - Introduce the content of B3 - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen - Ask Ss to practice read the dialogue in pairs - Call on Ss to read the dialogue loudly. - Correct the pronunciation. - Ask Ss to answer the questions: 1. What is Ba going to do on the weekend? 2. Which movie is he going to see? - Go around and help if necessary - Call on some Ss pairs to ask and answer loudly. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 14 ( B4, B5, B6, B7)

- Listen - Guess the meaning of the words

- Listen and repeat - Guess the activities - Listen and repeat - Pay attention and take notes - Work in pairs - Read the dialogue loudly

- Listen and pay attention

- Work in pairs - Ask and answer aloud - Copy down

- Listen - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly - Read the dialogue and answer the questions. - Show their work - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: March 25, 2012 Date of teaching: March 28, 2012 Period : 86

UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Lesson 4: B. FREE TIME PLANS (B4. B5, B6, B7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Listen and read comprehension about plans in free time. - Further listening and reading practice with going to - Plan to do something. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): camera, photo (v): bring, take, 2. Grammar: Near future: be going to 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, Write- it- up, prediction D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (3 mins) Ask Ss What are you going to do tonight/ tomorrow/ on the weekend? Warm-up(3 minutes) - Ask Ss if they have picnic and what they bring - Introduce the new lesson. Revision. B4. Answer(Page 145) ( 5 minutes) - Ask Ss to answer the question : What are you going to do on the weekend? begin with: on Saturday morning/ on Sunday morning.., I am going to. - Call on Some pairs to ask answer aloud - Ask Ss to copy their answers into notebooks at home. B5 Listen and Read. (Page 144) Pre- reading: (5 Minutes) - Introduce the content of B5 - Elicit the new words: + Camera (n): (Explanation, translation) + Bring (v): ( Translation) + Take a photo (exp): (Example) - Guide Ss to read the new words Pre- questions: 1. Where are they going to go? 2. What three things are they going to bring? 3. What are they going to do there? - Ask Ss to guess and answer the questions - Play the tape two times While- reading. (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to read the text and check their prediction. - Call on some Ss to give answers. - Correct Answer key: 1. Near a lake 2. a camera, food, drink 3. take photos - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions: - Answer - Listen - Ask and answer the questions - Ask and answer aloud

- Listen - Guess the meaning

- Listen and repeat

- Guess and answer - Listen - Read the text prediction - Give answers

and

check

- Work in pairs

+ What is going to do? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud. Post- reading: (5 minutes) - Ask the question: + What are you going to bring when you have a picnic? - Go around and help if necessary - Call on some Ss pairs to ask and answer loudly. B6. Listen (Page 145, 146) Pre- listening (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to name the things in the pictures - Ask Ss to guess matching - Write Ss prediction on the board While- Listening ( 6 minutes) - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to check their prediction - Call on Ss to give answers - Play the tape again and check the answers Answer key: Vui: a tent, some food Lan: a ball - Ly: a camera Mai&Nga: some drink Post- listening: (4 minutes) *Write-it- up: - Ask Ss to write sentences about five girls. Eg: Vui is going to bring some food. - Call on some Ss to read the sentences aloud Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson and ask Ss to understand B7 Remember - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Unit 14 (C1, C2, C3, C4)

- Ask and answer - Work in groups - Ask and answer aloud

- Name the things - Match - Listen and check their prediction - Give answer - Listen and check their answers

- Write sentences - Read their answers loudly

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: April, 1, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 3, 2012 Period: 87 UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Lesson 5: C. SUGGESTIONS (C1, C2, C3, C4) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Make suggestions about recreation plans. - Read and listen comprehension the dialogue about doing something. - Invite someone to do something with. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): minibus, idea, pagoda (adv): too far 2. Grammar: suggestions: + Lets../ Why dont we.?/ what about? 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, picture drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures:

1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 40 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (3 mins)
Ask Ss What are you going to do on the weekend?

Students activities

Warm-up(3 minutes) - Ask Ss to say activities in free time - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation: (10 Minutes) C1. Listen and read. ( Page 147) - Introduce the topic suggestions - Elicit the new words: + minibus, idea, pagoda (n): (Explanation, translation) + too far (adv): ( Translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Present new items: + Lets../ Why dont we.?/ what about? - Give examples to make sure Ss to understand the new items. - Ask Ss to guess answer the questions: +Where are they going to go? +How are they going to travel? - Play the tape two times - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in groups - Call on two groups to read the dialogue aloud. - Correct their pronunciation Practice. (10 minutes) ( C2. Answer. Then.../ page 148) * Questions and answers: - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions in pairs - Call on some Ss to answer aloud. - Correct Answer key: a. He wants to go to Hue b. She wants to go to Huong pagoda c. She wants to walk there d. Because its too far e. He wants to go by bike f. Because its too hot g. He wants to travel by minibus - Ask Ss to write the answers into exercise books Production: (15 minutes) C3. Look at the pictures. Work with.( Page 148, 149) * Picture drill: - Elicit the activities in the pictures. - Ask Ss to make suggestions about the situations in the pictures. - Call on Ss to Give answers - Correct the pronunciation. * Answer key: a) go swimming b) go to the museum c) play volleyball d) go to the zoo e) play badminton f) go camping Consolidation (2 minutes) C4: Remember (Page 149) - Ask Ss to look at C4 and explain the form and use. - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute)

- Answer - Listen - Listen - Guess the meaning of the words - Listen and repeat - Pay attention and take notes - Answer - Guess the activities - Listen - Work in groups - Read the dialogue loudly

- Listen and pay attention - Work in pairs - Ask and answer aloud

- Copy down

- Listen - Work in pairs - Give answers

- Listen and remember.

- Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare Grammar Practice F/ Self- Evaluation: Date of preparation: April, 1, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 4, 2012 Period : 88 GRAMAMAR A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Revise the use and form of the present simple, present progressive and going to forms. - Use the language to talk about their future plans, their frequency of the activities and talk about the weather and seasons. - Complete the exercises in the book. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: ( Review) 2. Grammar: (Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, picture drill D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (no) Warm-up (3 minutes) - Ask Ss to say what they learned in previous units. - Introduce the new lesson. Activity 1 (11 minutes) * Gap- fill: ( 1/3 Present simple tense, present progressive tense) (Page 150, 151) - Elicit the formation, use, and clues of the present simple tense, and present progressive tense - Ask Ss to use right form of verbs in the brackets then ask and answer in pairs in 1and 5. - Call on 2 pairs to ask and answer in 1 loudly then give the answers in 5 - Correct. Answer key: 1/ a. Do / like / do / play / do / dont. b. Does / does / likes / does / plays / does / doesnt. c. Do / do / do / dont. 3/ . a. am watching / playing / is playing b. is cooking / arent / is c. am doing / am reading.

Students activities

- Answer - Listen to - Pay attention - Work in pairs and individuals. - Give answers

Activity 2 ( 7 minutes) * Questions and answers: ( 2./Adverbs of frequency: Page 150) - Revise how to use the adverbs of frequency and answer the questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer aloud. - Correct Activity 3 ( 7 minutes) * picture drill: ( 4/ Future: be going to/ Page 1151,152) - Elicit the activities in the pictures. - Ask Ss to answer the question: What are they going to do? - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some to read answers loudly. - Correct * Gap fill: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the small the dialogue. - Call on two pairs to show their work * Questions and answers: - Ask Ss to answer the questions based on the dialogue. - call on Ss to give answers -Correct Activity 4 ( 7 minutes) * Questions and answers: ( 5. What is./6.Future plans/ Page 153) - Ask Ss to answer the questions - Go around and help if necessary. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer loudly. - Correct Consolidation (3 minutes) - Summarize +The target of the lesson. + Period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Learn Vocabulary and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare for the test

- Pay attention - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loudly.

- Pay attention - Look at the pictures and give answers - answer loudly - Work in pairs - Read the dialogue aloud. - Answer the questions

- Pay attention - Work in pairs - Give answers - Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: . Date of preparation: April, 4, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 6, 2012 Period : 90 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Lesson 1: A. WE ARE THE WORLD (A1, A2, A3) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn about the countries. - name some nationalities and language exactly - Introduce Vietnam country to the world. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): country, nationality, language, some countries and languages (v): speak

2. Grammar: Structures:

+ Where are you from? + I speak.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, table drill. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (no) Warm-up(3 minutes) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and guess where the people come from in Vietnamese. - Introduce the new lesson. Presentation: (10 Minutes) A1. Listen and repeat. ( Page 154) - Introduce the topic suggestions - Elicit the new words: + country, nationality, language, some countries and languages( n): (Explanation, translation) + Speak (v): ( Translation) - Guide Ss to read the new words - Present new items: + Where are you from? + I speak.. - Give examples to make sure Ss to understand the new items. - Play the tape two times and ask Ss to repeat - Ask Ss to practice reading the introduction in A1 - Call on some pairs to read aloud. - Correct their pronunciation Practice. (10 minutes) ( A2. listen and read/ page 148) * Questions and answers: - Play the tape two times. - Ask Ss to read A2 loudly - Correct - Ask Ss to answer the questions: 1. Where is Minh from? 2. Which language does he speak? - Call on two pairs to ask and answer aloud. - Correct Production: (15 minutes) A3. listen and repeat (Page 155) * Table drill: - Elicit the content in the table. - Help Ss read A3 - Correct the pronunciation. - Ask Ss to answer the questions based on the table. 1. Where is. From? 2. Whats his/ her nationality? 3. Which language does he/ she speak? Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute)

Students activities

- Look at the pictures and answer - Listen - Listen - Guess the meaning of the words

- Listen and repeat - Pay attention and take notes - Listen and repeat - Practice reading A1 loudly - Read loudly

- Listen - Read A2 aloud. - Read A2 questions and answer the

- Ask and answer loudly.

- Pay attention. - Repeat - Answer the questions. - Give answers

- Listen and remember.

- Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises in workbook - Prepare unit 15 (A4, A5, A6, A7) F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: April, 8, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 10, 2012 Period : 91 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Lesson 1: A. WE ARE THE WORLD (A4, A5, A6,A7) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn about the countries. - name some nationalities and language exactly - Introduce Vietnam country to the world. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): country, nationality, language, some countries and languages (v): speak 2. Grammar: Structures: + Where are you from? + I speak.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, table drill. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 43 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (no) Picture - Show them pictures of some famous people ans ask them about their - Look at the pictures. countries and nationalties. - Listen to the teachers questions + Where is he from? and answer about their countries + Whats his nationality? and nationalities. + Hes from Viet Nam. Warm-up(3 minutes) + Hes Vietnamese. 2 .Pre writing: * Vocabulary: - Listen to teacher . - a postcard: bu thiep - Repeat after the teacher. - wet: am t Notice the Vietnamese - a lot of = many: nhieu translation. - interesting places: nhng ni thu v - Copy in their notebook - to be on vacation: ngh Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Students repeat chorally and - Get students to call the English words. remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.

Presentation: (10 Minutes) A4. Listen and repeat. ( Page 154) - Show students the postcard. - A5 page 156: 1. Whos the postcard from? 2. Where is he? 3. Whats the weather like? 4. Is he traveling by train? 5. Whats he going to do tomorrow? 6. Whos he the postcard? 7. Wheres he? - Read the postcard aloud. - Mention the situation when the writer write the postcard. - Ask questions to elicit the content of the postcard. Grid Country City In .place M Japan Tokyo Fujiama Vietnam Hue Th.Citadel The Statue The USA New York of Liberty The Great China Beijing Wall Bondi Australia Sydney Beach The Eiffel France Paris Town - Explain how to work on the exercise: These are cities and intersting places of some countries: Japan, Vietnam, The USA . Now work in teams to put them in two columns + Where are you ? +Im in Japan.Im visiting Tokyo. +What are you goin to do tomorrow? + Im going to visit M.Fuj Practice. (10 minutes) ( A4. listen and read) Transformation Writing -Divide students into 6 groups -Help students write their postcards in groups. Explain how a postcard is written. Dear , Im on vacation in London. The weather is Production: (15 minutes) - Ask some students to read their postcards aloud. - Correct if there are any mistakes. - Encourage the good students to put more details in their postcards if possible. Suggested postcard Dear Minh,

- Look at the postcard shown by the teacher.

- Read the postcard. - Listen to the teachers emphasis. - Try to answer the questions about the content of the poatcard.

- Listen to the teacher. - Repeat the words aftre the teacher. - Work in teams to put the words in two columns. - Use the Grid as cues to ask questions and answer.

- Work in groups - Write their postcards in groups. - Listen attentively.

- Some students read their postcards aloud. - Correct the mistakes if there is any. - Try to write as many sentences as possible.

Im on vcation in Beijing . The weather is cold. Im traveling by car and writing a lot of interesting places. Tomorrow, Im giong to visit The Great Wall of Beijing Love, Nga Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and how to write a postcard. - Take notes and memorize - Have them do exercises on page 124, 125,126 in the workbook and - Do homework as the teacher prepare Unit 15 - Lesson 1: (B1) : Comparative and Superlative requests. F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: April, 9, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 11, 2012 Period : 92 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Lesson 1: B. CITIES , BUILDINGS , PEOPLE (B1 , B2) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn about the countries. - name some nationalities and language exactly - Introduce Vietnam country to the world. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): country, nationality, language, some countries and languages (v): speak 2. Grammar: Structures: + Where are you from? + I speak.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, table drill. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 43 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (no) 1. Warm up : * Answer the questions: P6 /157 a, I'm..... a. What's your name? b, I'm.... b. How old are you? c, I'm from.....

c. Where are you from? d. Which school do you go to? -T gets feed back from Sts. Warm-up(3 minutes) Presentation pictures - Show students the pictures in B1 on page 158, ask them to observe and tell about each thing. - Write the words on the board and ask them to repeat. Presentation: (10 Minutes) I. Vocabulary: 1. the capital: th (situation) 2. the building: to nh cao tng (picture) 3. the population: dn s Comparision: Tall - taller - the tallest Cold - colder - the coldest Small - smaller - the smallest Big - bigger - the biggest Wet - wetter - the wettest Hot - hotter - the hottest Have sts read chorally check: rub out & remember II. Presentation: 1. Set the scence: picture Lan: Ha Noi is bigger than Da Nang Ba: But Ho Chi Minh is the tallest. 2. Pratice reading 3. Do the concept check: - Meaning? 1. S + be + short Adj + than+S2

d, I go to Tu Lan secondary school.

- Look at the pictures and tell the teacher about the different of things presented. Say out English Read chorally & individually

Write down Do rub out & remember Say out English Read chorally & individually

Write down Do rub out & remember

- Use: cp so snh hn (so snh gia hai ngi/ vt) 2. S+ be + the short Adj+ est. - Use: So snh hn nht (so snh 1 vt/ ngi vi nhiu vt/ ngi) * Note: Tnh t ngn l tt c mt m tit - Vi cc tt ngn kt thc bng 1 p m trc l 1 ng m ta nhn i p m cui trc khi thm er/est Practice. (10 minutes) 1. Listen & read A1 P158 2. Read the text & fill in the gaps: small smaller smallest biggest Mexixo Tokyo London Ha Noi 3. Answer the questions: a. No, HCM city is bigger than Ha Noi city. b. Mexico city c. Tokyo IV. Production: Have sts read the number: 13.6 = thirteen point six

Listen & read after the disc Pratice reading the text Do individually Share with a friend Listen to Others' correction Listen to Ts answers Practice reading the number Read the number of population

6.3 = six point three Production: (15 minutes) A3. listen and repeat (Page 155) * Table drill: - Elicit the content in the table. - Help Ss read A3 - Correct the pronunciation. - Ask Ss to answer the questions based on the table. 1. Where is. From? 2. Whats his/ her nationality? 3. Which language does he/ she speak? Consolidation (2 minutes) - 4. Consolidation: 2 - The main structure & vocabulary? Homework (1 minute) 5. Homework: 2 - Practice the structure at home - Write 2 sents using comparative and 2 sents using superlative - Do Ex 2,P82, 2 p83 Week Date of making Period 94 Date of teaching Class 6A

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: .. Date of preparation: April, 10, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 13, 2012 Period : 93 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Lesson 1: B. CITIES , BUILDINGS , PEOPLE (B3 , B4, B5) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn about the countries. - name some nationalities and language exactly - Introduce Vietnam country to the world. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): country, nationality, language, some countries and languages (v): speak 2. Grammar: Structures: + Where are you from? + I speak.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, table drill. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities

Students activities

Check up: (no) Warm-up(3 minutes) -Written the numbers on the board. -Puts Ss in 2 groups -Lets each group choose one number & answer the questions. If Ss choose 4-6 are lucky numbers, they will get 2 marks. -Lets Ss play game. -Elicits from Ss -Models. -Checks meaning & pronunciation. REVISION Lucky Numbers 1.Whats the biggest city in VN?(HCMC) 2.Whats the biggest city in Britain? (London) 3.whats the biggest city in Japan? (Tokyo) 4.LUCKY NUMBER! 5.Whats the tallest mountain you know? 6.LUCKY NUMBER! 7.Whats the wettest city you know? 8.which ones colder: cantho or sapa? Presentation: (10 Minutes) Pre-Teach long thick over a million wordsquare W C L L A T E T O V E R T H N O D H B I G L L I I C E D O G G K R X C H -Read the numbers. -Divide into 2 groups (A/B) -Choose one number & answer the questions. If the answer is right, Ss get 2 marks. -Play game. -Listen -Repeat in chorus -> individual. -Copy down. -Copy down.

high

-Find the meaning words

-Puts the cities in order.

-Read and check their order . -Read the text again .

Ordering Which in the biggest city in the world? Put the cities in order : biggest first. HCMC ,London, Tokyo, Hanoi, Mexico city. (1) (3) (2) (5) (1) Practice. (10 minutes) B2 p. 159 Comprehension Questions-B2 p. 159 Guess from text B3 p. 160 -a population -the capital city B4 p.161 -a building -a structure -meters -kilometers Comprehension Questions B3 B4 p.160 161 Answers Given Production: (15 minutes)

- Guess the meaning of these words.

Answer given - Ask and answer the questions. - Ask students to ask questions and answer: - Work in pairs + Which is the biggest city in the world? + Mexuco City + How high is Sear Tower? + 442 meters. - Mexico City - 442 meters - The Great Wall - HCMC - Petronas Twin Towers - 12 million Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and comparatives. - Have them prepare Unit 15 - Lesson 5: (C1-2) : Lot of F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: April, 15, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 17, 2012 Period : 94 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Lesson 1: C. NATURAL FEATURES ( C1,C2,C3,C4) A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn about the countries. - name some nationalities and language exactly - Introduce Vietnam country to the world. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n): country, nationality, language, some countries and languages (v): speak 2. Grammar: Structures: + Where are you from? + I speak.. 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, table drill. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins)

Teachers activities Check up: (no) Warm-up(3 minutes) moutains beautiful fields beaches rivers lakes . Presentation: (10 Minutes) * Vocabulary: - a forest: rng - a desert: sa mac - a lot of = lots = many: nhieu - great (adj): to ln Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words.

Students activities Group works. - Say Enghlish words . - Run forward and slap the correct words on the board. - Continue until students have slapped all the words-> individual. -Copy down. -Copy down.

- Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. Notice the Vietnamese translation. - Copy in their notebook. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.

Practice. (10 minutes) Presentation text - Show students the text and let them to the cassette and repeat. - Listen to the cassette and repeat. - Ask some students to read aloud and ask them: + What are there 6 natural peatuers Lan tells us about? - Some students read the text - Show them a picture of a desert and ask them if they know why there aloud and answer: isnt a desert in Viet Nam. + mountains, rivers, lakes, rain, - Ask them to give the formation of a lot of... forests, beaches. - Let students copy the models and the formations, and memorize. - Look at the picture of a desert and answer the question : Because we have lotsof rain / the country very green, we have big Production: (15 minutes) forest, a lot of lakes and rivers. Write it up - Look at the board. - Write the words on the board. - Work in teams - Get students to come up to the board to match the cities with natural - Come up to the board then features . match . - Check - Check. - Get students use the cues to write a passage about natural features in Viet Nam - Write a passage about natural features in Viet Nam. Consolidation (2 minutes) - Summarize the lesson - Listen and remember. - Give the period of the lesson. Homework (1 minute) - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and lots of - Have them prepare Unit 15 - Lesson 6: (C2 - 3) : Reading a text about the worlds great rivers and mountains F/ Self- Evaluation:

.. Date of preparation: April, 15, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 18, 2012 Period : 95 TEST CORRECTION + TEST 15 Period 43; CORECTION THE TEST + Test 15 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Learn from the errors in the tests. - Control better method of learning for next lessons. Teacher can evaluate students knowledge and change suitable method in next teaching lessons. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (Review): 2. Grammar: ( Review) 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Chain- game, picture cue drill, pair- work, gap-fill D/ Teaching aids: A4 papers E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) 3. Key I. Chn cu tr li ng nht: 2ms 1. How often 2.are never 3. weather 4.are doing 5. Twice a week 6. in 7. go 8. do you play II/ Chn ra mt t khng cng nhm vi t cn li (3ms) 1.e 2.b 3.f 5.c 6.d III/ Chia hnh thc ng ca ng t trong ngoc n (2 ms) 1. watches 2. to go 3. is cooking IV/ c on vn v tr li cu hi( 2 ms ) 1. There are 4 seasons 2. No. It isnt. 3. They often go swimming. 4. Ss answer V. Vit li cu ngh : 1m 1. Why dont we play soccer after class? 2. What about going to the beach ? 4. Results 4.a

4. is gong to visit

Lp 6A3 6A4 All

Bi HS lm/ s HS 36 40 76

>= 8 0 3 3

>= 5 8 7 15

< 5 10 14 24

< 3.5 17 2 19

4. Homework (1 minute) Prepare unit 16: A1, A2. F/ Self- Evaluation: .. TEST 15 1.Cho dng ng cua ng t trong ngoc: Son ( 1. be) from Vietnam. He (2. speak) Vietnamese. He can (3. speak) English, too. He ( 4. live) with his family in Ho Chi Minh city . He often ( 5. go) to school on Sundays to practice his English. II. Chan cu tr li ng: 1. She is .. Canada. A. by B. from C. at D. on 2. Mai is smallest girl in her class. A. a B. an C. the D. than 3. The highest mountain in the world is A. Everest Mountain B. Mountain Everest C. Everest Mount D. Mount Everest 4. Yoko is from Japan. She speaks .. A. China B. Chinese C. Japan D. Japanese) 19. Ho Chi Minh has a ___________of 3.5 million . A. city B. capital C. population D. country

Key I. 1. is II. 1. B

2. speaks 2. C

3.speak 3. D

4.lives 4. D

5.goes 5. C

Date of preparation: April, 18, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 20, 2012 Period : 96 UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 1: A1,A2 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Help Sts some vocabulary, practice with a lot, a little, a few to talk about food and reading a text. - To develop in Sts the speaking, reading and writing skills. - By the end of the lesson Sts will be able to use vocabulary and structure well. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - a few/ a little 2. Grammar: Structures: 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing

C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, table drill. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Check up: (no) Warm-up(3 minutes) 1. Warmer: * Jumble words a. gegs b. ceir c. niono d. kilm -T gets feed back from Sts. Presentation: (10 Minutes) I. Vocabulary: 1. (to) produce: sn xut (situation) 2. (to) grow: trng (picture) 3. (to) plow: cy (situation) 4. (to) pull a cart: ko xe (translation) 5. a buffalo: con tru (picture) 6. a dog: con ch (picture) 7. a cat: con mo (picture) 8. animals: ng vt (exampple) Have sts read chorally * check: rub out & remember Pre - reading:5ms Set the scence: picture T/F prediction: 1. Mr Hai is a farmer. 2. He produces some rice. 3. He grows a little vegetables. 4. He has a few cows. While- Reading: 14ms 1. Listen & read A2 P166 Get feed back from sts Answers: 1.T 2. F 3. F 4. T 2. Read the text and answer the questions: Answers: a. He produces a lot of rice. b. Yes, he does. c. He proceduces a few vegetables. d. They produce a little milk. e. They produce a lot of eggs. Post- reading:10ms 1. Structure: Set the sence: He grows a few vvegetables. They produce a little fruit. Practice reading Form: - a few (mt t/ vi): dng vi danh t m c trong cu khng nh. - a little(mt t/ vi): dng vi danh t khng a. eggs c. onion

Students activities b. rice d. milk

Say out English Read chorally & individually

Write down Do rub out & remember . Listen Do individually Share with a friend Say out their guessing Listen & read Give answers Read the text again & do Read out the answers Other correct & listen to the T

Practice reading Do the concept check give the same and difference between them write down

Do individually

m c trong cu khng nh. 2. Practice: Dng some, a, an, few, little, lot/ lots: 1. I eat ....... banana every morning. 2. The farmers produce ........... of rice. 3. Do you have........ eggs? 4. I can speak a ........ English. 5. Would you like ...... tea? 6. She needs a ........... of meat. 7. There are a ...... people in the house. 8. She has ...... cookies. 9. There is ...... eraser on the table. 10. I'm hungry. I want .......... milk. Consolidation (2 minutes) - The main vocabulary and structure? Homework (1 minute) - Write 4 sentences using a few and a little. - Do Ex 1/87- VBT; Ex V/ 91; 7/112 - Bt ting Anh 6.

Say out the answers Give correction Nam.

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: April, 22, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 24, 2012 Period : 98 UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 2: A3 A/ Objectives: After the lesson, students can: - Help Sts some vocabulary, practice with a lot, a little, a few to talk about food and reading a text. - To develop in Sts the speaking, reading and writing skills. - By the end of the lesson Sts will be able to use vocabulary and structure well. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - a few/ a little 2. Grammar: Structures: 3. Language skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing C/ Techniques: Pre- teach, questions and answers, pair work, table drill. D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, board, chalk, cassette player, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 min) 2. New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities

Students activities

Check up: (no) Warm-up(3 minutes) Jumble Words: -Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order toespota = potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions tableveges = vegetables
Presentation: (10 Minutes)

Work in groups to rewrite the words in the order

Presentation text : A1 p.166 -Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice the text Model sentences : a. How much rice is there ? There is some A lot of A little rice b. How many eggs are there ? There are some Alot of eggs A few

Ss listen , and practice the text ,then give examples Ss copy down on their notebook

Work in pairs to match

3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167 - Asks Ss to match the sentences to the Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e Picture drill: A1 p.166 and A3 P.167 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S 1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are a few . 4 Production : Chain game : -Asks Ss to play chain game Example : S1 : There is a little rice S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a few eggs Consolidation (2 minutes) Vocabulary Homework: Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)

Work in pairs to to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: How much ricwe is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are afew

Work in groups to play chain game

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: April, 25, 2012 Date of teaching: April, 27, 2012 Period : 99 UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 3: B1 , B2 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas about the pollution I.Knowledges : pollution vocabulary II. Skill: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : Greeting Check attandence New lesson:( 44 mins) Teachers activities Students activities Check up: (no) 1 Revision :STB -Asks Ss to play this game Work in groups to match Viet Ph hy trng cy sn xut con vt namese with EL words Mi nguy him t chy cy at ai Presentation: (10 Minutes) 2.Pre-reading : Pre-teach The enviroment (trasnlation): mi trng The ocean (synomyn: sea ): i dng ( to) pollute (example): nhim (to) waste (translation): lng ph the air(example): khng kh coal( realia): than oil( realia): du gas (translation): ga power (example ): nng lng - T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: What and where gas the air oil waste coal ocean power Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook

Work in groups to play this game

Work in groups to predict the answers

Pre questions -Predict : -Asks SS to predict the answers with answer keys 1.What are we destroying ? - forests, wild animals, plants 2.What are we wasting ? - water, coal, oil , gas 3. What are we polluting ? - the air, the land, the rivers, the oceans 3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167 3 While -reading: B1 P.169 -Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. - asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions Answer keys : 4. a. Because we are destroying 5. b. Gases is polluting the air 6. c. 4 Post -reading : Write it up -Asks Ss to use the predict pre questions to make a list of donts Example : Dont destroy our environment Dont destroy the forest Dont destroy the plants Dont destroythe wild animals Dont waste water Dont pollute the air Dont pollute the oceans Homework: Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)

Listen and reads the text to check their predictions Then answer the questions

Work in groups to use the predict pre questions to make a list of donts

- Listen and remember.

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: April, 30, 2012 Date of teaching: May , 2, 2012 Period : 100 UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Lesson 4 : B 4,5,7 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice present simple and progressive , comparative and superlatives, quantifiers and countability. I.Knowledges : Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary. II.Skill: Speaking and writing

III.Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I.Settlement Greeting Check attandence

New lesson: Teachers activities Check up: (no) Students activities * Jumbled words -llcoct = collect = plow -plloute = pollute = save -ckpi = pick = throw

1. Warm up : + go to the board and put the letters in correct order. 2.Presentation: - explain some new words + listen and copy down repeat

-wplo -eavs -htrow

3.Practice: - read the text + listen and repeat + read

Vocabulary : -a trash can = a waste basket: thung rac -to leave ( act): vt, bo -to put (ast): at ,e -a bag (drawing/ pict): cai tui 2.Rub Out And Remember .

B4.Listen and Repeat. Text book.171

+ look at the pictures of B5, then practice speaking , using the model sentences. 4.Production: - ask Ss to use the word cue drill to make the sentences. -read the text, Ss repeat. + answer the questions in pairs

S1: we shouldnt leave trash. S2: thats right. C.Production:Word cue drill +water waste / save +power waste / save +paper burn / collect +trash - leave / put it in the trash can +trees damage / grow +forest - cut down / grow +bottles thrrow / collect +flowers pick / leave S1: We shouldnt waste water. S2:Thats right, We should save it

5.Homework: + write 4 sentences about what we should / shouldnt do to protect the invironment. + prepare next part Grammar Practice

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: May , 2, 2012 Date of teaching: May , 4, 2012 Period : 101 GRAMMAR PRACTICE A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice present simple and progressive , comparative and superlatives, quantifiers and countability. I.Knowledges : Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary. II.Skill: Speaking and writing III.Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I.Settlement Greeting Check attandence

New lesson: Students activities T-Whole class

Teachers activities Check up: (no) 1. Countries and Languages: *Simple present : -T recalls the way to use this tense Form: S + V-s/es Uses: miu t hnh ng thng xuyn xy ra . Countries and Languages Japanese Japan -Ask ss to do exercise 1p.174 (text book) Answerkey: a.Are... from/ Am not/ speak b.Speaks c.Is Chinese e.Is Vietnamese d.Is Japanese f.Is American 2.Present simple and present progressive: +Mapped dialouge: ........name? Susan ........Live ? London .......Stay now? Hanoi .......do ? Teacher What....teach ? English ......teach you? No, .....Mr Hai

Work in groups to to do exercise 1p.174 (text book)

Work in pairs to mapped the dialouge

Answer key: 1.What is her name? 2.Where does she live? 3.Where is she staying now? 4.What does she do? 5.What does she teach? 6.Does she teach you? -ask ss to do the exercise 2 P.174 (text book) 3.Adj: Comparative and superlatives: -Asks Ss to complete the table and then complete the passages. Long Longer Longest Short Tall Small Big High Thick a. The Mekong river is long. The Amazon river is ...than the Mekong. The Nile river is.....river in the world. b. The Great Wall of China is long. It is... ... structure in the world c. Sears Tower in Chicago is tall, but it isnt .... ... building in the world. Petronas twin Tower in Kuala Lumpur is .... than Sears Tower. It is ... ... building in the world. d. Ha noi is gig, bt it is not the .... city in Viet nam. HCMC is ... than Hanoi. It is ... city invietnam. But Mexico city is.. ...city in the world. F/ Self- Evaluation: .. Date of preparation: May , 2, 2012 Date of teaching: May , 5, 2012 Period : 102 REVISION 1 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice grammar unit 9 - 11 I.Knowledges : II.Skill: Speaking and writing

Work in individually to complete the table and then complete the passages.

III.Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I.Settlement Greeting Check attandence

New lesson: Teachers activities Students activities Listen to the teacher carefully.

I.LEAD IN: Now we will revises the present simple tense and present progressive tense and Idefinite quantifiers: a few, a lot/ lots. Adjectives. II. PRE PRACTICE: 1. The Present simple tense: S + V(s, es) S + dont/ doesnt + Ving Do/ Does + S + Ving ? Ex: We play tennis everyday. 2. The Present progressive tense: S + is/ am/ are + Ving S + isnt/ am not/ arent + Ving Is/ Are + S + Ving ? Ex: He is playing badminton at the moment d. Minh is from VN. He . . . e. Yoko is from Japan. She . . . f. Jonh is from USA He . . . 2.Present simple and present progressive tense a. What is her name ? b. Where does she live? c. Where is she staying now? d. What does she do? e. What does she teach? f. . . . she . . . you? No, She . . . teach me. Mr Hai . . . me

Listen to the teacher then write down in their note books Her names Susan She lives in London She is staying in HN now She is a teacher She teaches English

3. Adj: comparatives and superlative: corrects 4. Indefinite quantifiers: A few, alittle, a lot, lots corrects

Does she teach you? No, She doesnt Mr Hai teaches me. a. longer/ longes b. the longest c. the tallest/ taller/ the tallest d. biggest / bigger / the biggest / the biggest A lot/ a little/ a few/ a lot/ lots/ a lot

4. Consolidation : (5 ms) Asks the students to complete these sentences.


The nile River is . . . than The Mekong River. The Great Wall of China is the . . . struture in the world. There is . . . of traffic in HCM City. Peter is . . . British. He . . . . English. 5. Homework : (2 ms) - Do the exercises againin your exercise notebooks - Review from Unit 9 to Unit 16 - Prepare Grammar

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..

Date of preparation: May , 2, 2012 Date of teaching: May , 5, 2012 Period : 103 REVISION 2

A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice grammar unit 12 - 14 I.Knowledges : Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary. II.Skill: Speaking and writing III.Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I.Settlement . New lesson: Greeting Check attandence

I.LEAD IN: Now we will revise the verb to be,there commands Present Simple tense, this, that, possessive pronouns, Time, Greetings II. PRE PRACTICE: 1. To be: Present simple tense: I am . . . He/ she/ it is . . . We/ You/ They are . . . Ex: How old are you? - Im eleven Is she twelve? - Yes, she is. - No, she isnt. 2. There: There is one. There are two. Ex: How many tables are there? - There is one. 3. Imperative: Come in Sit down 4. Present simple tense: S + V(s, es) Where do you live? - I live in Qui Nhon 5. This/ That: What is this/ that? - It is (this/ that is) a pencil. Who is this? - Its Mr Minh 6. Question words: What is your name? - My name is Nam How old are you/ - I am twelve Where do you live? - I live in Qui Nhon Whos this ? - Its my sister

Listen to the teacher carefully. Listen to the teacher carefully. Write down Notebooks in their

F/ Self- Evaluation: .. Date of preparation: May , 2, 2012 Date of teaching: May , 6, 2012 Period : 104 REVISION 3

A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice present simple and progressive , comparative and superlatives, quantifiers and countability. I.Knowledges : Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary. II.Skill: Speaking and writing III.Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I.Settlement Greeting Check attandence Teachers activities I.LEAD IN: Now we will revises: a/ an/ some/ any, would, want/ need, adverbs of frequency, Future, Weather and seasons , comparatives and Superlatives , Dimensions , quantifiers, should. II. PRE PRACTICE: indefinite Students activities Listen to the teacher carefully. Listen to the teacher carefully then repeat

New lesson:

1. a/ an/ some/ any: We have a banana. They have an orange. Do you have any fruit? Yes, I do I have some fruit 2. would: S + Would+ Vinf They would like vegetables. What would you like?

Read , say then write down in their notebooks

Id like some orange juice 3. want/ need: What do you want? I want some ham How much do you need? I need two kilos. 4. Adverbs of frequency: Lan sometimes goes to the movies She often watches TV She is never late for school 5. Future: going to: What are you going to do? I am going to visit Hue I am going to stay in a hotel? No, he isnt going to stay in a hotel 6. Weather and the seasons: Its sunny. Whats the weather like in the summer? Its hot 7. Adj: Comparatives and Superlatives: 7. Ho Chi Minh City is big London is bigger than HCM City Mexico City is biggest city in the world 8. Dimensions: How long is the Great wall of China How high is it? It is between 4 and 12 meters high 9. Indefinite quantifiers: For lunch he eats a little meet, a lot of rice and few vegetables 10. Should: We should protect the environment We should not drop trash S + should/ should not + Vinf III. CONTROLLED PRACTICE Asks students to practise in pairs

Practise in pairs

F/ Self- Evaluation: ..